Home

FM 355 closed-loop control module

1. Data type Description Index number REAL Polyline interpolation point 12 output 28 side REAL Polyline interpolation point 13 output 29 side REAL Start up time of the ramp for the 30 reference variable REAL Safety reference variable or safety 31 reference variable response REAL Offset for setpoint link ratio mixing 32 controller REAL Factor for process value B three 33 component controller REAL Factor for process value C three 34 component controller REAL Offset for process value link three 35 component controller REAL Factor for disturbance variable link 36 REAL Operating point 37 REAL Aggressivity at fuzzy controller 38 REAL Vertices for split range function Start of 39 input signal A range REAL Vertices for split range function End of 40 input signal A range REAL Vertices for split range function Start of 41 output signal A range REAL Vertices for split range function End of 42 output signal A range REAL Vertices for split range function Start of 43 input signal B range REAL Vertices for split range function End of 44 input signal B range REAL Vertices for split range function Start of 45 output signal B range REAL Vertices for split range function End of 46 output signal B range REAL Minimum pulse time 47 REAL Minimum pulse time 48 INT Choice of reference variable SP or 49 SP_RE for the controller 0 Setpo
2. external manipulated variable Ao Zj effective Switch manipu external lated manipu Manipulated variable lated value qL SaL g variable P Switch Switching Limiting follow up safety Pulse manipulated shaper variable er Follow up input y Position feedback input Figure 3 27 Controller output of the step controller step controller operating mode with position feedback external manipulated J variable N ee e Ya effective Switch Switching Pulse manipulated external safety shaper variable manipulated manipulated value variable Figure 3 28 Controller output of the step controller step controller operating mode without position feedback At a step controller without analog position feedback the external manipulated value and the safety manipulated value act as follows If a value between 40 0 and 60 0 is specified no binary output is set and the actuating device remains unchanged If a value gt 60 0 is specified Actuating signal high is output until the checkback Actuating device at upper limit is triggered If a value lt 40 0 is specified Actuating signal low is output until the checkback Actuating device at lower limit is triggered FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 3 25 How Does the FM 355 Control 3 4
3. Addr Parameter Data Comment Permitted range Default Explanation In the type English of values setting parameter assign ment screen form 0 0 COM_RST BOOL Read parameters If the parameter from system data COM_RST TRUE is set the CJ_T_PAR FB carries out an initialization run In the process the parameters are read from the system data of the CPU and saved in the instance DB 2 0 MOD_ADDR_ INT FM 355 455 256 The module address module address that resulted from the configuration with STEP 7 is given at this input 4 0 CJ_T REAL Cold junction Depending on 0 0 The reference junction temperature the sensor type temperature can be specified at the CJ_T parameter FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 11 33 Assignment of the Instance DBs 11 7 Instance DB of the C _T_PAR FB Output Parameters Table 11 15 Output parameters of the instance DB for the CJ_T_PAR FB Addr 8 0 Parameter RET_VALU Data type WORD Comment English Return value SFC 58 59 SFB 52 53 Permitted range of values Default setting Explanation RET_VALU includes the return value RET_VAL of the SFC 58 59 With the block for PROFINET Mode the RET_VAL includes the 2nd and 3rd bytes from the STATUS parameter of the SFB 52 53 RET_VALU can be evaluated if an error is reported via the QMOD_F see reference manual 2 In the para
4. Preparing the set point Multiplying FAC e gt _ eee SHH HX gt e Setpoint Effective set ianipuiaten Switching Ramp Limiting Normaliz point variable LMN of se ae r the master signal controller g e 2 2 Process value A Process value PV 1 r _ Process value B Effective process value Pi e N e D input Disturbance variable Figure 13 15 Realizing the component controller slave controller See also Introduction Page 7 23 FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 13 15 Examples 13 6 Interconnection example for a mixed control FM 355 closed loop control module 13 16 Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 FB 29 and FB 30 A 1 Use The FB 29 PID_PAR function block FB 29 PID_PAR is used for online modification of parameters that cannot be specified through FB PID_FM The block uses SFC 102 and can therefore only be deployed in the new S7 300 CPU with MMC Creating and supplying power to the instance DB Before you program the module with the user program you need to create an instance DB for each controller channel you wish to use and supply them with the required data 1 In STEP 7 create the instance DBs as data blocks with an assigned FB PID_PAR function block 2 For each instance DB enter the module address
5. C C FM 355 S a o 3 Backup Q1 4 4 iF g a 4 Q2 2 ict 27 fal 2 3 3 _ 3o D dla dE 5 l o oj 3 4 _ fo ol 4 s5 s0 5 s o 3 5 Oe 6 Ice 6 _ o o 6 Q7 I t Lae ae fel fel 7 Os _ P ia I s JON 2 H K 10 10 y hh e o 11 1 g lo a 12 12 Ic 2g p M qe 103 B o P 13 4 Bel Ic oO z 14 1h i tyy fo 5 15 D 15 4 5 z 16 16 Ic p 5 17 133 O up D Kj q 18 18 18 fo fo 19 1N 12 7 m I o 2 0 20 Mana E 355 1VH00 0AE0 a p Figure 5 2 Terminal assignment of the front connectors of the FM 355 S Front view of the module Front connectors Terminal assignment of the left hand front connector 0O00 Terminal assignment of the right hand front connector FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 5 3 Wiring the FM 355 5 7 Terminal assignment of the front connectors Front Connector Assignment of the FM 355 S Table 5 2 Terminal assignment of the front connectors of the FM 355 S Left hand front connector Right hand front connector Con Analog Name Function Con Con Name
6. FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Faults and Diagnostics 12 2 Triggering diagnostic interrupts Byte Bit Meaning Note Event No 7 Analog output short circuit Only with the 8 x B7 voltage output of the C controller 9 0 See Byte 8 Channel specific diagnostics channel See above 2 10 0 See Byte 8 Channel specific diagnostics channel See above 3 11 0 See Byte 8 Channel specific diagnostics channel See above 4 12 0 See Byte 8 Diagnostics for reference channel See above FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 12 5 Faults and Diagnostics 12 3 Measuring transformer error 12 3 Measuring transformer error Faults at Measuring Transducers The following measuring transducer faults can be recognized by the controller module e Measuring range violation underrange e Measuring range violation overrange e Wiring breakage not at all measuring ranges If one of these faults occurs the group error bit External error is set in the diagnostics record DSO and the channel specific error bits in the diagnostics record DS1 refer to the tables in the previous section When these faults disappear the corresponding bits are reset The following table shows at which limits in the individual measuring ranges the error bits are set and reset Measur
7. e Process value A Effective process value e ___ _ _ D input S Iuauaaaasasssssssussssssssssssssssssssssi iaiassss5S Disturbance variable Figure 13 12 Realizing the ratio control with the controller module 13 12 FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Examples 13 6 Interconnection example for a mixed control 13 6 Interconnection example for a mixed control Mixed controllers for three components The following figure shows a mixed control for three components Total quantity Main components SP1 or higher Di CP Controller 1 LMN 3 r F Bi pulse i Pr cessi controller PV controller Ej FAC1 PV2 step action gi mNDN Process 2 4 controller LW FAC4 PER PV3 step action QLMNDN Process 3 controller FACS Figure 13 13 Mixed controllers for three components The main controller is configured as a three component controller and pulse controller The controllers 1 2 and 3 are configured as ratio mixed controllers The interconnection for the main controller is shown in the following figure FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 13 13 Examples 13 6 Interconnection example for a mixed control You can configure the mixing factors for the components PV2 and PV3 via the add up button If you have
8. eccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeseaeeeeeeaeeessiaeeegess 6 1 6 2 Configuring the NardWare xx ade suatetees sist dana ae eee recs idea vet ee ee 6 2 6 3 Parameter aSSigniments ic2 vivid vieednedehrentte NEE E eae ede ede 6 2 Implementing the FM 355 in the User Program c scccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeaaeeeeeeeesseeaeeeeeeeeessseaeeeeed 7 4 SUMMARY aa gh daade ace dad relates tii Mad cde GR ed 7 2 The tunction block PID FMs veined eines anes 7 2 1 Operator Control via the PID_FM FB 0 0 cececceceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeaeceeeeeeeseeaeaeeeeeeesesecaeeeeeeeeeeeaees 7 2 2 Monitoring via the PID_FM FB uu eee ccceeeceeeeeee cence ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseneeeeseeeeeeeseeeeereeeees 7 2 3 Changing Controller Parameters Using the PID_FM FB eeeececeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeetnaeeeee 7 2 4 Changing controller parameters via the OP eeccceceeeneeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaaeeeseeaeeeeeenaeeeeesas 7 2 5 Saving the parameters in EEPROM cccceeseeeeeceeeeeneeeeeeeaeeeeeaaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeseeaeeeeeeaeeeenaas 7 2 6 Relationship between FB parameters and the parameterization interface 00006 7 3 The FUZ 395 function DIOCK sessen a deat 7 14 7 4 The FORCEZS9TuUNCION DIOGK sesine ARE BEE E 7 16 7 5 The READ 355 function DIOCK s i ccieten vinta stavedsvencdicen veaccee vinden aa 7 18 7 6 The CH_DIAG function bIOCK sssssccssssssssssssesssessssssseesssnsussssnses
9. 3 4 Controller CP LMN LOLMNUP Section Section ection lon Controller 1 E aes Controller 2 Qi MNDN part1 j part2 L J L J PV PV Figure 3 6 Two loop cascade control Preparing the set point emer SK gt apo lige Effective set Switching Ramp Limiting point safety set gt point Error sigrf l Totalizing Factor for process value B Factor for process value C Offset Interrupt el gt u Process value Effective z gt process value gt NL Process value B oN e e gt NS o D input ts Process value C Py Nae ee Disturbance variable Figure 3 7 Negative deviation generation for three component controllers FM 355 closed loop control module 3 10 Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 How Does the FM 355 Control Setpoint Actual value D Process value A 3 4 Controller Preparing the set point Multiplying a x Effective set Switching Ramp Limit standard point safety set ize gt point Error signal Interrupt Alarm Effective process value poe Figure 3 8 Disturbance variable Negative deviation generation for ratio or composition controllers T
10. FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Data Sheet B 2 Technical Specitications FM 355 Further data for selecting a sensor analog inputs Switching frequency e At resistive load lamp load e At inductive load Max 100 Hz Max 0 5 Hz Internal limiting of the inductive shutdown voltage to Typ L 1 5 V Short circuit protection of the output Yes electronic Actuator selection data Digital outputs Output ranges Rated values 10V from 0 to 10 V from 0 to 20 mA from 4 to 20 mA Load resistance e At voltage outputs min 1 kQ Capacitive load max 1 UF e At current outputs max 500 Q Inductive load ae Voltage output e Short circuit protection Yes e Short circuit current Max 25 mA Current output e Open circuit voltage Max 18 V Connection of actuators e At voltage output with 2 wire connection Possible e At current output with 2 wire connection Possible Analog Value Generation Measuring principle Integrating Resolution incl overrange Configurable 12 bits 14 bits Conversion time per analog input e At 12 bits resolution e At 12 bits resolution e At 14 bits resolution 16 2 3 ms at 60 Hz 20 ms at 50 Hz 100 ms at 50 and 60 Hz Settling time e For resistive load e For capacitive load e For inductive load 0 2 ms 3 3 ms 0 5 ms Input of substitution values Ye
11. Technical specifications Required memory in the CPU System data 1258 bytes B 10 FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Spare Parts C 1 Spare Parts Spare Parts The following table lists all spare parts of the S7 300 that you can order for the FM 355 either additionally or later Table C 1 Accessories and spare parts 7 300 parts Order No Bus connector 6ES7 390 0AA00 0AA0 Label sheet 6ES7 392 2XX00 0AA0 Slot number label 6ES7 912 0AA00 0AA0 Screw type front connector 20 pin 6ES7 392 1AJ00 OAA0 Shield contact element with 2 screw type 6ES7 390 5AA00 0AA0 bolts Shield terminals for e 2 cables each with a shield diameter of 2 6ES7 390 5AB00 OAAO to 6 mm e 1 cable with a shield diameter of 3 to 6ES7 390 5BA00 0AA0 8mm e 1 cable with a shield diameter of 4 to 13 mm 6ES7 390 5CA00 0AAO FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 C 1 Spare Parts C 1 Spare Parts C 2 FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 References D 1 References Supplementary References The table below lists all the manuals referred to in this manual No Al Title SIMATIC S7 S7 300 Programmable Controller Hardware and Installation Order No 6ES7 398 8AA03 8AA0 2 SIMATIC System Software for
12. 7 Contact in the output circuit Inductance requires a circuit Z refer to figure below Figure 5 3 Relay contact in the output circuit FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Wiring the FM 355 5 7 Terminal assignment of the front connectors Circuiting of Coils Operated with DC Voltage Direct current coils are circuited with diodes or Zener diodes with diode with Zener diode VONE me pi ZX a WV u a Figure 5 4 Circuiting of coils operated with DC voltage Wiring with diodes Zener diodes Diode Zener diode circuits have the following characteristics e Opening overvoltages can be avoided totally Zener diodes have higher interruption voltages e Long switch off delay 6 to 9 times longer than without a protective circuit Zener diodes switch off faster than diode circuits FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 5 7 Wiring the FM 355 5 2 Wiring front connectors 5 2 Wiring front connectors Cables Here are some rules for you to observe when selecting cables e The cables for Digital inputs 11 to 18 have to be shielded if the length exceeds 600 m e The cables for the analog signals have to be shielded e You must apply the shields of the analog signal cables both at the encoder and in the immediate vicinity of the module via the shield contact
13. FM 355 closed loop control module 11 22 Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Assignment of the Instance DBs 11 3 Instance DB of the FB FORCE355 11 3 Instance DB of the FB FORCE355 Introduction The FB FORCE355 is required to simulate analog or digital input values of the FM 355 The following tables list the parameters of this instance DB e Input parameters e Output parameters Input Parameters Table 11 6 Input parameters of the instance DB for the FORCE355 FB Addr Parameter Data Comment Permitted range of Default Explanation In the type English values setting parameter assign ment screen form 0 0 S_AION ARRAY Switch simulation FALSE If for example the 1 4 of of analog input by S_AION 1 switch is BOOL PV_SIM set to TRUE the value PV_SIM 1 is used instead of the analog input value 1 of the module 2 0 S_PVON ARRAY Switch simulation FALSE If for example the 1 4 of of linearized S_PVON 1 switch is BOOL analog input by set to TRUE the value PV_SIM PV_SIM 1 is used instead of the conditioned analog input value 1 of the module FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 11 23 Assignment of the Instance DBs 11 3 Instance DB of the FB FORCE355 Addr 4 0 Parameter PV_SIM Data type ARRAY 1 4 of REAL Comment English Simulated analog input
14. 10 4 Connecting Loads Actuators to Analog Outputs Introduction With the FM 355 C you can supply the loads actuators with current or voltage The figure below illustrates the principle Lines for Analog Signals You should use shielded and twisted pair lines for the analog signals This reduces the effect of interference You should ground the shield of the analog lines at both ends of the line If there are differences in potential between the ends of the cables equipotential current may flow across the shield which could disturb the analog signals If this is the case you should only ground the shield at one end of the line Reference Point Mana When operating the module always interconnect the reference point Mana of the measuring circuit with terminal M of the CPU Connect the Mana terminal to the M terminal of the CPU A difference in potential between Mana and the M connection of the CPU might give rise to a corruption of the analog signal Abbreviations Used The abbreviations used in the figure below have the following meaning Q Analog output current or voltage depending on the configuration Mana Reference potential of the analog circuit Ri Load Actuator L Power supply 24 V DC M Ground terminal FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 10 13 Connecting Measuring Transducers and Loads Actuators 10 4 Connecting Loads Actuators to Analog Outputs Connectin
15. A 5 List of RET_VALU messages A 16 JOB_ERR JOB_ERR JOB_ERR Meaning Hex Dec Int 873A 34618 30918 Parameter DB not present Read job 8745 34629 30907 Error at n th n gt 1 write access to a DB after an error has occurred Read job 8Off 33023 32513 Incorrect index specification with block FMT_PAR Errors 80A2 80A4 and 80Cx are temporary i e after a waiting period they can be eliminated without any action on your part Messages of the 7xxx form indicate temporary operating states of communication FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Data Sheet B 1 Technical Specifications S7 300 General technical specifications Approbations General technical specifications are e Electromagnetic compatibility e Shipping and storage conditions e Mechanical and climatic environmental conditions e Specifications for insulation tests protection class and degree of protection These general technical specifications are explained in Manual 1 They contain standards and test values that the S7 300 fulfils and the criteria used to test the S7 300 The S7 300 has the following approvals UL Recognition Mark Underwriters Laboratories UL in accordance with Standard UL 508 CSA Certification Mark Canadian Standard Association CSA to Standard C22 2 No 142 FM approval complying with Factory Mutual Approval Standard Class Number
16. Controlled Type of controlled system Tu or Ti Tg or Ts Vmax Ax At variable Temperature Small electrically heated 0 5 to 1 min 5 to 15 min 1 C s furnace Large electrically heated 1 to 5 min 10 to 60 min 0 3 C s annealing furnace Large gas heated 0 2 to 5 min 3 to 60 min annealing furnace Distillation tower 1 to 7 min 40 to 60 min 0 1 to 0 5 C s Autoclave 2 5 m3 0 5 to 0 7 min 10 to 20 min High pressure autoclave 12 to 15 min 200 to 230 min 1000 C 40 bar Steam superheater 30 s to 2 5 min 1 to 4 min 2 C s Room heating 1 to 5 min 10 to 60 min 1 C min Flow rate Pipeline with gas Oto5s 0 2to10s Pipeline with liquid 0 0 Pressure Gas pipeline 0 0 1s Drum boiler with gas or oil 0 150s firing Drum boiler with impact 1 to 2 min 2 to 5 min grinding mills Vessel level Drum boiler 0 6 to 1 min 0 1 to 0 3 cm s Speed Small electric drive 0 0 2to10s Large electric drive 0 5to 40s Steam turbine 0 50 min Voltage Small generators 0 1to5s Large generators 0 5to10s 1T Dead time 2 Ts section constants FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 2 17 Information for the controller adjustment 2 6 Determining the System Parameters for Two Three Step Controllers 2 6 Procedure 2 18 Determining the System Parameters for Two Three Step Controllers You can record the heating and cooling behavior of the temperature controlled systems by me
17. Errors with the analog inputs or analog outputs Analog input hardware error Replace the module Analog input wire break Remedy wire break Analog input measuring range violation underrange Check measuring signal Analog input measuring range violation overrange Check measuring signal Analog output wire break Remedy wire break Analog output short circuit Eliminate short circuit Missing external auxiliary supply 24 V supply missing Restore 24 V supply Diagnostic interrupt in the case of errors All errors can trigger a diagnostic interrupt if you have enabled the diagnostic interrupt in the respective parameterization screen From the diagnostic data records DSO and DS1 you can see which errors have caused the LED to light up The assignment of the diagnostic data records DSO and DS1 is described in the next section FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 12 1 Faults and Diagnostics 12 2 Triggering diagnostic interrupts 12 2 Triggering diagnostic interrupts What is a diagnostic interrupt If the user program reacts to an internal or external error you can configure a diagnostic interrupt that interrupts the cyclic program of the CPU and calls the diagnostic interrupt OB OB 82 Which events can trigger a diagnostic interrupt The list shows which events can trigger a diagnostic interrupt e The mod
18. 1 Use STEP 7 to create the instance DB as a data block with an assigned READ_355 function block 2 Enter the module address in the MOD_ADDR parameter at the instance DB The module address of the FM 355 is specified during the configuration of your hardware Take over the start address from HW Config 3 Save the instance DB Call The READ_355 FB has to be called in the same OB as all the other FBs that access the same FM 355 Displayed values The following values are displayed e The CJ_TEMP parameter shows the reference junction temperature measured at the reference junction in degrees C or in degrees F depending on the temperature unit that was configured If no Thermocouple sensor type was configured or if the configured reference junction temperature was selected at all the analog inputs 0 0 is displayed at the CJ_TEMP parameter e The actual states of digital inputs 1 to 8 are displayed at parameters STAT_DI 1 to STAT_DI 8 even if these are simulated e The values of analog inputs 1 to 4 are displayed at parameters DIAG 1 PV_PER to DIAG 4 PV_PER in the unit mA or mV respectively If the simulation of the analog input value is activated via the FORCE355 FB the simulated value is displayed FM 355 closed loop control module 7 18 Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Implementing the FM 355 in the User Program See also 7 5 The READ_355 function block e The values of analog inputs 1
19. Assignment of the Instance DBs 11 1 Instance DB of the PID_FM FB Addr 39 1 Parameter QDNRLM Data type BOOL Comment English Limit of negative setpoint inclination reached Permitted range of values Default setting FALSE Explanation The setpoint is limited in positive and negative inclination If the negative set value inclination reached output is set then the set value inclination is restricted In the parameter assign ment screen form 39 2 QSP_HLM BOOL High limit of setpoint reached FALSE The setpoint is always limited by an upper and lower limit The output Upper limit of setpoint value triggered indicates that the upper limit has been exceeded 39 3 QSP_LLM BOOL Low limit of setpoint reached FALSE The setpoint is always limited to a high and a low limit The low limit of set value reached output displays the falling short of the low limit 39 4 QLMNUP BOOL Manipulated signal up FALSE This is the output Manipulated value signal up For step controllers or pulse controllers only 39 5 QLMNDN BOOL Manipulated signal down FALSE This is the output Manipulated value signal down For step controllers or pulse controllers only 39 6 QID BOOL Identification in work FALSE QID TRUE shows that an identification is running not that it is switch
20. Creating and Supplying an Instance DB Before you program the module with the user program you have to create an instance DB and supply it with important data for each controller channel that you want to use 1 Use STEP 7 to create the instance DBs for the controller channels as data blocks with an assigned PID_PAR function block 2 Enter the module address in the MOD_ADDR parameter at every instance DB The module address of the FM 355 is specified during the configuration of your hardware Take over the start address from HW Config 3 Enter the channel number of the corresponding controller channel 1 2 3 or 4 in the CHANNEL parameter at every instance DB 4 Save the instance DBs Call The PID_PAR FB has to be called in the same OB as all the other FBs that access the same FM 355 FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 7 23 Implementing the FM 355 in the User Program 7 7 The PID_PAR function block Changing Parameter Values With the PID_PAR FB you can change one each of the REAL parameters listed in the table below and one each of the INT parameters during each call Note With PROFIBUS DP operation with FB 39 from the FM 355 455 PID Control library there is the restriction that only REAL values with INDEX_R 30 48 can be transferred simultaneously with an INTEGER value The assignment of the specified value to the parameter is carried out via
21. Disturbance variable All influence variables on the control variable with the exception of the manipulated variable are called disturbance variables Additive influences on the section output signal can be compensated for by superimposing with the actuating signal Disturbance variable compensation The disturbance variable compensation is a procedure for reducing removing the influence of a dominating measurable disturbance variable e g external temperature on the control circuit A corrective operation is derived from the measured disturbance variable DISV so that changes to the DISV can be reacted to more quickly In the ideal case scenario the influence is fully compensated for without the controller itself having to execute a corrective process via the part FM 355 closed loop control module Glossary 2 Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Glossary Fixed setpoint control A fixed setpoint control is a control with a fixed only rarely changing reference variable Controls any disturbance variables that occur during the process Follow up control Follow up control is a control where the reference value is constantly influenced from outside underlaid controller of a multi loop control The task of the follow up controller is to cover the local control variable with the reference variable as quickly and precisely as possible part integral component Integral component of the controller
22. In addition to the information below the information contained in the section Connecting Measuring Transducers to Analog Inputs applies In the figures below the required connecting lines between the M connection of the CPU M Mana and the potential to ground which result from the potential connection of the FM 355 to the sensor insulated non insulated are not shown This means that you must continue to observe and implement the information given in the section Connecting Measuring Transducers to Analog Inputs FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 10 7 Connecting Measuring Transducers and Loads Actuators 10 2 Use of Thermocouples Thermocouples with External Compensation of the Reference Junction 10 8 If all the thermocouples which are connected to the inputs of the FM 355 have the same reference junction carry out compensation as shown in the following figure The thermocouples which use a reference junction must be of the same type FM 355 Supply conductor L copper M g e M i M Thermo o couple e e i M elements i l lt eo e M Gee ing cable i l IC same i T COMP material as i lV for thermo i couple i i elements i i COMP i IC Reference junction ADC I FM 355 f Process Logic ing in the Figure 10 4 Block diagram for con
23. Ne variable B Correction input Manipulated variable follow up Figure 7 18 Displayed values of the continuous action controller or step controller The output parameter RET_VALU contains the feedback value RET_VAL of the SFCs RD_REC and WR_REC With the blocks for PROFINET operation the RET_VAL includes the 2nd and 3rd bytes of the STATUS parameter of the SFB RDREC and WRREC The values of RET_VALU are described in the reference manual 2 Parameter optimization with temperature controllers Page 3 41 Introduction Page 7 20 Instance DB of the CH_DIAG FB Page 11 28 FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Implementing the FM 355 in the User Program 7 7 The PID_PAR function block 7 7 The PID_PAR function block Use The PID_PAR FB is used for online changing of further parameters that cannot be specified via the PID_FM FB The PID_PAR FB does not require an initialization run To this purpose it has to be called with the COM_RST TRUE parameter before it writes data records to the FM 355 Otherwise calling the FB generates a parameter configuration error on the module You can also read out these parameter assignment errors by using the PLC gt Parameter Assignment Error menu of the parameter configuration interface In order to save run time the PID_PAR FB should not be called cyclically but only when parameters are to be changed COM_RST must then be FALSE
24. Creating and Supplying an Instance DB Call 7 14 Before you program the module with the user program you have to create an instance DB and supply it with important data 1 Use STEP 7 to create the instance DB as a data block with an assigned FUZ_355 function block 2 Enter the module address in the MOD_ADDR parameter at the instance DB The module address of the FM 355 is specified during the configuration of your hardware Take over the start address from HW Config 3 Save the instance DB The FUZ_355 FB has to be called in the same OB as all the other FBs that access the same FM 355 FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Implementing the FM 355 in the User Program 7 3 The FUZ_355 function block Using the FM FUZ_355 See also When you have carried out an identification of the temperature controllers and the controllers control with satisfactory results call the FUZ_355 FB and set the READ_PAR parameter to TRUE The FB then reads the parameters of all four temperature controllers of the FM 355 and places them in the instance DB After the temperature controller parameters have been read out successfully the FUZ_355 FB sets the READ_PAR parameter to FALSE This can take a few call cycles if the FM 355 is used in distributed I Os You should therefore call the FB conditionally after READ_PAR has been set as long as READ_PAR TRUE You should set the LOAD_PAR
25. D_EL_SEL e gt gt Disturbance variable Figure 7 2 Negative deviation generation at fixed setpoint or cascade controller effective setpoint Mo effective process value Temperature gt controller effective manipulated variable GAIN TM_LAG TI P_SEL DEADB_W TD PFDB_SEL 2 Error signal z Dead zone K Manipulated variable follow up Disturbance variable Figure 7 3 Block diagram of the control algorithm FM 355 closed loop control module 7 8 Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Implementing the FM 355 in the User Program LMN_RE LMN_REON 7 2 The function block PID_FM LMNOP_ON external ipulated__ ene AL LMN_OP SAFELON LMN_HLM LMN_SAFE LMN_LLM _ anipulated Manipulated variable A effective Switch manipulated external NO z variable LMNTRKON variable manipulate Si value Switching Limiting pilt range pa safety Gn manipulated Switch variable correction Manipulated variable B oe e Correction input Manipulated variable follow up Figure 7 4 Controller output of the continuous action controller external manipu lated variable pa effective Switch PULSE TM manipu external BREAK TM lated manipu Manipulated variable lated value NO NO variable Fl Switch Switching Limiting Spli
26. Manipulated value signal down For step controllers or pulse controllers only 125 4 QBACKUP BOOL backup FALSE 0 No backup state CPU in RUN 1 Backup state CPU in STOP or failed 125 5 QID BOOL Identification in work FALSE QID TRUE shows that an identification is running not that it is switched on After the end of the identification the identification result can be read off from the parameters IDSTATUS of the FB CH_DIAG FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 11 49 Assignment of the Instance DBs 11 8 Assignment of the DBs for Operator Control and Monitoring via OP Addr Parameter Data Comment Permitted range of Default type English values setting 125 6 QMAN_FC BOOL Manual mode or FALSE anti reset windup by follower controller 126 0 RET_VALU INT Return value 0 SFC 58 59 SFB 52 53 Explanation The controller is a master controller which is tracked by manual operation of a secondary controller is tracked to its process variable or whose integral component is halted because the setpoint value or manipulated variable of the secondary controller is in the limitation RET_VALU includes the return value RET_VAL of the SFC 58 59 With the block for PROFINET Mode the RET_VAL includes the 2nd and 3rd bytes from the STATUS parameter of the SFB 5
27. PULSE_TM REAL Minimum pulse gt 0 0 0 2 A minimum pulse length Pulse time s 2 can be configured on the shaper Minimum pulse minimum pulse time controller width s parameter Split For step controllers or range pulse controllers only function Pulse generator controller 144 0 BREAK_TM REAL Minimum break gt 0 0 0 2 A minimum pulse Pulse time s 2 duration can be assigned shaper Minimum with the parameter controller interpulse width Minimum break time Split s For step controllers or range pulse controllers only pulse generator controller 1 You can also change these parameters via the loop display 2 Default values of the module after the first start up of the PID_FM FB with COM_RST TRUE FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 11 19 Assignment of the Instance DBs 11 2 Instance DB of the FUZ_355 FB See also 11 2 Introduction 11 20 Note If LOAD_PAR TRUE is set all the control parameters are loaded permanently to the EEPROM of the FM 355 With LOAD_OP TRUE only the setpoint SP_RE of the operator parameters is loaded permanently to the EEPROM of the FM 355 All the other operator parameters have the values 0 or FALSE pre assigned during the FM 355 startup The EEPROM of the module could be destroyed by excessive writing processes In order to prevent this the module delays renewed writing to the EEPROM by 30 minutes
28. _4 Effective set Switching Ramp Limiting point safety set point Error signal Fg i e Process value A Effective process value gt gt D input gt _ EE A e Disturbance variable Figure 13 10 Realizing the cascade control with the controller module FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 13 11 Examples 13 5 Interconnection example for a ratio control 13 5 Interconnection example for a ratio control Ratio controlling with two control circuits The following figure shows a ratio control with two control circuits pS SP 1 pe Controller 1 EMNI a Process 1 epee tl fo LMN 2 Controller 2 Process 2 Ld Figure 13 11 Ratio controlling with two control circuits The controller 1 is configured as the fixed set point controller Controller 2 is configured as a ratio mixed controller The following figure explains its interconnection The ratio factor FAC is specified by the set value input of the FB PID_FM SP_RE or SP_OP Preparing the set point Multiplication FAC Process value Switching Ramp Limiting safety set point Po XL L L To ee Setpoint _J 4 x x Effective A point gt Error signal PV1 Actual value D Process valu PV2
29. physical variable 2 limited to a high and a setpoint low limit The Setpoint controller low limit input specifies the lower limit 84 0 H_ALM REAL High limit alarm gt H_WRN 100 0 Four limits can be Alarm physical variable 2 assigned for monitoring controller the process variable or the negative deviation The Upper limit alarm input specifies the highest limit 88 0 H_WRN REAL High limit H_ALM L_WRN 90 0 Four limits can be Alarm warning physical variable 2 assigned for monitoring controller the process variable or the negative deviation The Upper limit warning input specifies the second high limit FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 11 17 Assignment of the Instance DBs 11 1 Instance DB of the PID_FM FB Addr Parameter Data Comment Permitted range of Default Explanation In para type English values setting meter configu ration mask 92 0 L_WRN REAL Low limit warning HLWRN L_ALM 10 0 Four limits can be Alarm physical variable 2 assigned for monitoring controller the process variable or the negative deviation The Lower limit warning input specifies the second lower limit 96 0 L_ALM REAL Low limit alarm lt L_WRN 0 0 Four limits can be Alarm physical variable 2 assigned for monitoring controller the process variable or the negative deviation The Lower limit alarm
30. specifies the lowest limit 100 0 HYS REAL Hysteresis gt 0 0 1 0 To prevent flickering of Alarm physical variable 2 the monitoring displays a controller hysteresis can be configured at the hysteresis input 104 0 DEADB_W REAL Dead band width gt 0 0 0 0 A dead band is applied to Dead physical variable 2 the negative deviation band The Dead band width controller input determines the size of the dead band 108 0 GAIN REAL Proportional gain Complete range of 1 0 The input proportional PID values 2 gain indicates the Control dimensionless controller gain ler 112 0 TI REAL Reset time s 0 0 or gt 0 5 3000 0 The integration time PID 2 input determines the time Control response of the ler integrator If TI 0 the integrator is deactivated 116 0 TD REAL Derivative time 0 0 or gt 1 0 0 0 The derivative time PID s 2 input determines the time Control response of the ler derivative unit If TD 0 the derivative unit is de activated 120 0 TM_LAG REAL Time lag of the TM_LAG gt 0 5 5 0 The algorithm of the D PID derivative action 2 action includes a time lag Control s that can be assigned to ler the Time lag of the derivative action s input 124 0 LMN_SAFE REAL Safety 100 0 100 0 0 0 For the manipulated Switching manipulated 2 value a security value to safety value can be configured on the manipula Safety Security manipulated ted val
31. 1 Faster transient response than determined via identification You will find a detailed description of the temperature controller in the Temperature regulator FM 355 manual FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 3 15 How Does the FM 355 Control 3 4 Controller Control Algorithm and Controller Structure 3 16 Within the cycle of the configured sampling time the manipulated variable of the continuous controller is calculated from the negative deviation in the PID position algorithm The controller is designed as a purely parallel structure refer to figure below The proportional integral or derivative actions can each be deactivated individually At the integral and differential action components this is done by setting the respective parameter TI or TD to zero DISV_SEL DISV O O i GAIN om x 5 N Linear combination Figure 3 13 Control algorithm of the FM 355 parallel structure Disturbance variable compensation A disturbance variable DISV can additionally be fed forward to the output signal of the controller Activation and deactivation is carried out in the Negative deviation window of the configuration tool via the Signal selection disturbance variable controller switch P D part in the feedback In a parallel structure the negative deviation is used as the input signal at every action component of the control algorithm In this st
32. 3 3 digital outputs 3 29 Front connectors 5 3 Interconnection possibilities FM approval B FM x55 S Example application 3 1 Followup FORCE355 Purpose Simulation of analog values 7 16 Simulation of digital values 7 17 Index 3 Index FORCE355 FB Instance DB Purpose Simulation of analog values 7 16 Simulation of digital values 7 17 Four wire measuring transducer Connecting 10 1 Front connector coding Front connector FM 355 C Connector assignment 5 2 View 5 Front connector FM 355 S Connector assignment 5 4 View 5 Front connectors Connection possibilities Order 1 6 Wiring 5 9 Function block Creating an instance DB 7 20 7 23 7 29 Creatting an instance DB 7 14 7 16 7 18 Function blocks for S7 300 CPU Overview Technical specifications FUZ_355 Purpose using FUZ_355 FB Instance DB Purpose using G Group error LED 12 1 H Hardware Configuring Hardware interrupts HW installation and wiring 8 Hysteresis for warning and interrupt limits l control Identification Cancel Completion of the controlled system Index 4 Possible problems Preconditions IDSTATUS 3 44 IDSTATUS controller state Input delay 5 6 Input filters 5 6 Inputs of the FM 355 installing FM 355 on mounting rail Installing FM 355 Parameter setting interface Installing and removing the FM 355 Instance DB CH_DIAG FB 11 28 CJ_T_PAR FB
33. 3 42 Parameter optimization is based on a self optimizing fuzzy controller In order for the temperature controller to operate optimally the controlled system has to be identified To this purpose the identification has to be activated by means of the FUZID_ON 1 parameter in the instance DB of the PID_FM function block and a setpoint value step change of gt 12 of the maximum setpoint value carried out The identification of the controlled system begins with a monitoring phase during which no heat output takes place The duration of the monitoring phase is as follows e Monitoring phase continuous controller Approx 1 min e Monitoring phase step controller Approx 1 min 1 2 x actuating time of final control element This time is used in order to determine temperature trends in the heating medium Afterwards the maximum heating output of 100 is output This is visible at the LMN output parameter in the instance DB of the PID_FM function block The range of the first 4 of the temperature increase of the setpoint value range is used for the identification whereby information about the process response is obtained at 1 and 4 respectively of the temperature increase on the basis of the time that has passed FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 How Does the FM 355 Control 3 8 Parameter optimization with temperature controllers The identification is complete when the heati
34. After a jump like change to the control variable or negative deviation the output variable changes ramp like over the time and at a rate of change that is proportionate to the integrated gain KI 1 Tl In a closed control loop the integral part adjusts the controller output variable until the negative deviation becomes zero Limit alarm monitor Algorithm function for monitoring an analog variable for four specified limits When reaching or exceeding falling short of these limits an associated warning 1st limit or alarm signal 2nd limit is generated To prevent signal flicker the disable threshold switch back difference of the limit signals can be set via a parameter for the hysteresis Limiter Algorithm function for restricting the value range of constant variables to specified lower upper limit values Manipulated value correction The manipulated value correction prevents a step change at the manipulated value during the changeover from manual to automatic mode The manipulated value remains unchanged during the changeover from manual to automatic mode Manipulated variable The manipulated variable is the output variable of the controller or input variable of the control section The actuating signal can portray the range of the manipulated variable analogously as a percentage or as a impulse value or pulse width With integrated actuators e g motor it is sufficient to provide binary upwards downwards or forwar
35. Assignment of the Instance DBs 11 8 Assignment of the DBs for Operator Control and Monitoring via OP Addr 123 4 Parameter QSP_HLM Data type BOOL Comment English High limit of setpoint reached Permitted range of values Default setting In the para meter assign ment screen form Explanation FALSE The setpoint is always limited to a high and a low limit The output Upper limit of setpoint value triggered indicates that the upper limit has been exceeded 123 5 QSP_LLM BOOL Low limit of setpoint reached FALSE The setpoint is always limited to a high and a low limit The low limit of set value reached output displays the falling short of the low limit 123 6 QSPOPON BOOL Setpoint operation on FALSE The output set value operation on indicates whether the set value is being operated by the configuration tool circle diagram If the bit is set the value SP_OP is used as the setpoint value 123 7 QLMNSAFE BOOL Safety operation FALSE If the output Safety mode is set the safety manipulated value is output as the manipulated value 124 0 QLMNOPON BOOL Manipulated value operation on FALSE The output Manipulated value operation on indicates whether the manipulated value is being operated via the configuration tool loop display If the bit is set the value LMN_OP is used as the manip
36. P D action component is output at the LMN parameter 30 0 LMN_A REAL Manipulated 100 0 100 0 0 0 On the output value A of split Manipulated value A of range the split range function function repeate position feedback in d manipulated the case of continuous value controllers the manipulated value A of the split range function and with step controllers with analog position feedback the position feedback is displayed The LMN_A output can only be used for an approximate display of a respective simulated manipulated variable In doing so the start value LMNRSVAL of the simulated position feedback has to be configured accordingly and becomes effective when LMNRS_ON is set 34 0 LMN_B REAL Manipulated 100 0 100 0 0 0 Manipulated value B of value B of split the split range function range function is displayed at the output Manipulated value B of the split range function at a continuous action controller FM 355 closed loop control module 11 4 Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Assignment of the Instance DBs 11 1 Instance DB of the PID_FM FB Addr 38 0 Parameter QH_ALM Data type BOOL Comment English High limit alarm reached Permitted range of values Default setting FALSE Explanation The actual value or the controlled variable is monitored for four limits Exceeding of the limit H
37. Parameter Data Comment Permitted Default Explanation In the para type English range of setting meter values assignment screen 18 0 COM_RST BOOL read parameters TRUE If the parameter from system data COM_RST TRUE Read parameters the FB PID_LPAR from system data performs an initialization The parameters are read from the system data of the CPU and saved in the instance DB The block sets COM_RST automatically The user usually sets COM_RST to TRUE in OB100 FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 A 9 FB 29 and FB 30 A 3 The FB 30 CJ_T_PAR function block A 3 The FB 30 CJ_T_PAR function block Use The FB 30 CJ_T_PAR is used for online modification of the configured reference junction temperature This is required when a temperature control system with several FM 355s with thermoelement inputs is operated without connecting a Pt 100 to each FM 355 If for example the reference junction temperature is measured with an FM 355 at an extruder control system with more than four heating zones this can be read out via READ_355 FB at the CJ_TEMP parameter and configured at the other FM 355 units via the FB 30 CJ_T_PAR Creating and supplying power to the instance DB Before you program the module with the user program you need to create an instance DB and supply it with the required data 1 Use STEP 7 to create the instance DB as d
38. RET_VALU can be evaluated if the parameters READ_PAR and LOAD_PAR are not reset The values of RET_VALU are described in the reference manual 2 Instance DB of the FUZ_355 FB Page 11 20 FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 7 15 Implementing the FM 355 in the User Program 7 4 The FORCE355 function block 7 4 The FORCE355 function block Use The FORCE355 FB is used to simulate force the analog and digital input values to support commissioning The FORCE355 FB does not require an initialization run It is normally called cyclically Creating and Supplying an Instance DB Before you program the module with the user program you have to create an instance DB and supply it with important data 1 Use STEP 7 to create the instance DB as a data block with an assigned FORCE355 function block 2 Enter the module address in the MOD_ADDR parameter at the instance DB The module address of the FM 355 is specified during the configuration of your hardware Take over the start address from HW Config 3 Save the instance DB Call The FORCE355 FB has to be called in the same OB as all the other FBs that access the same FM 355 Simulating Analog Values Simulation of the analog values for channels one to four is activated via the switches S_AION i or S_PVON i whereby 1 lt i lt 4 The following figure shows at which point the simulated analog value is effective
39. Simulation switch on input S_DION i Simulation value ro configured DI_SIM i IO 4 gt Digital val Digital input J 0 Gee NEUS io il Figure 7 14 Effect of simulation values At a restart of the FM 355 after a power off the simulation switches on the FM 355 are positioned again to FALSE The output parameter RET_VALU contains the feedback value RET_VAL of the SFCs RD_REC and WR_REC With the blocks for PROFINET operation the RET_VAL includes the 2nd and 3rd bytes of the STATUS parameter of the SFB RDREC and WRREC The values of RET_VALU are described in the reference manual 2 Note Activation and specification of the simulation values forcing is not carried out via the parameter configuration interface The corresponding switches and connecting lines are therefore drawn dashed FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 7 17 Implementing the FM 355 in the User Program 7 5 The READ_355 function block See also Instance DB of the FB FORCE355 Page 11 23 7 5 The READ_355 function block Use The READ_355 FB is used to read out the digital and analog input values to support commissioning The READ_355 FB does not require an initialization run It is normally called cyclically Creating and Supplying an Instance DB Before you program the module with the user program you have to create an instance DB and supply it with important data
40. and LMN_OP out of the FM and saves them in the instance DB The FB thus takes over the operating state of the FM After the reading process the parameter is set to FALSE FM 355 closed loop control module 11 10 Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Assignment of the Instance DBs 11 1 Instance DB of the PID_FM FB Addr Parameter Data Comment Permitted range of Default Explanation In the type English values setting parameter assign ment screen form 42 0 QMOD_F BOOL Module error FALSE The function block checks correct reading and writing of a data record In the case of detected errors the output Module error is set The error cause can be An incorrect module address at the parameter MOD_ADDR an incorrect channel number at the parameter CHANNEL or a defective module In Out Parameters Table 11 3 I O parameters of the instance DB for the PID_LFM FB Addr Parameter Data Comment Permitted range of Default Explanation In para type English values setting meter configu ration mask 44 0 COM_RST BOOL Read control FALSE _ If the parameter parameters from COM_RST TRUE is FM 355 455 set the PID_FM FB carries out an initialization run In the process the control parameters all the parameters after cont_par are read from the FM and stored in the instance DB In addition the validity of the parameters MOD_AD
41. and the simulated controlled system as well as of the call blocks for restarting OB 100 and a watchdog interrupt level OB 35 with 100 ms cycle Table 13 2 Blocks of Example 2 Block Name Description in the toolbar OB 100 Restart OB OB 35 Time controlled OB 100 ms FC100 APP_2 Example 2 FC101 SIM_355 Process value transfer in the controller module C FB 31 PID_FM Continuous action controller in the controller module C FB 100 PROC_C Controlled system for continuous action controller DB 100 PROCESS Instance DB for PROC_C DB 31 DB_PID_FM Instance DB for PID_FM FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 13 7 Examples 13 2 Application example for the FM 355 C Parameters of the Model Controlled System for Continuous Action Controllers The following figure shows the function scheme and the parameters of the controlled system Input parameters Output parameters Signal Type Parameter Type PROC_C FB 100 COM_RST BOOL FALSE CYCLE TIME T 1s GAIN REAL 0 0 DISV REAL 0 0 INV_DOWN REAL 0 0 TM_LAG1 TIME T 10s TM_LAG2 TIME T 10s TM_LAG3 TIME T 10s Figure 13 7 Function scheme and parameters of the system model PROC_C Default setting when the instance DB is created Parameters and Step Response The reaction of a control loop wi
42. at which the amplitude of the output signal represents the manipulated variable the output variable is formed at a two step controller with feedback through pulse width modulation Two step controllers with feedback are used for temperature control in furnaces at processing machines in the plastics textile paper rubber and foodstuff industries as well as for heating and cooling devices Three Step Controllers Three step controllers are used for heating cooling These controllers have 2 switching points as their output The control action results are optimized through electronic feedback structures Fields of applications for such controllers are heating low temperature climatic chambers and tool heating units for plastic processing machines A y Y11 Y 1275Y 21 Y22 gt Ww x s XSh Figure 2 4 Characteristic curve of a three step controller y Manipulated variable e g y11 100 heating y12 0 heating y21 0 cooling y22 100 cooling x Controlled variable e g temperature in C w Setpoint XSh Distance between Switching Point 1 and Switching Point 2 FM 355 closed loop control module 2 6 Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Information for the controller adjustment 2 3 Control Response at Different Feedback Structures 2 3 Control Response at Different Feedback Structures Control Behavior of Controllers In order to achieve the precision of a control system and optimal
43. external QLMNRE ae manipulated a variable QLMN_HLM a LMN_OP QLMNSAFE QLMN_LLM LMN QSPR Manipulate effective Switch NO variable MAS manipulated external QLMNTRK _J variable manipulate Manipulated value Switching Limiting Split range variable A i safety manipulated LMN_B Switch variable correction Manipulated variable B e er e Correction input lt Manipulated variable follow up Figure 7 10 Controller output of the continuous action controller external manipu lated variable e effective Switch manipu external lated manipu Manipulated variable lated value O po variable fl QLMNUP a a p QLMNDN Switch Switching Limiting Split range correction safety pulse shaper manipulated variable gt Correction input Manipulated variable follow up Figure 7 11 Controller output of the step controller pulse controller operating mode FM 355 closed loop control module 7 12 Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Implementing the FM 355 in the User Program 7 2 The function block PID_FM external manipu lated _ variable _ effective Switch manipu external lated manipu Manipulated ano variable lated value variable lt a pe L n F TL Switch Switching Limiting correction safety Pulse 3 eal ee shaper vari ae e Correction input QLMNDN QLMNUP Ma
44. is in the error state This state is indicated by the fact that the manipulated variable is reset permanently by the controller This is also not changed by deactivating the optimization The error state is deleted by starting a new identification Information about the state of the identification is available through the IDSTATUS parameter of the CH_DIAG FB e By the operator by generating a negative setpoint value step change whereby the setpoint value must lie below that of Condition 2 see above How To Start identification Note Deactivation of the optimizing mode with FUZID_ON 0 before identification has been completed does not stop the identification An identification process that has been started continues to run under all circumstances with the exception of a negative setpoint value step change Controller behavior with different control sections Problems do not arise in case of an uncritical controlled system neither during identification nor during controlling The identification of a controlled system that is too critical is cancelled Controlling of an identified critical controlled system is carried out very carefully or slowly Controller State Information The IDSTATUS parameter of the FB CH_DIAG function block supplies information about the identification state Figure 3 35 IDSTATUS parameter of the CH_DIAG FB FM 355 closed loop control module 3 44 Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006
45. to support commissioning The FB 39 PID_PAR for changing other parameters online The FB 40 CJ_T_PAR for changing the configured reference junction temperature online Note FB 39 and FB 40 from the FM_PID FM 355 455 PID Control library do not run under S7 300 CPUs with a Micro Memory Card If you use a CPU with a PROFINET connection take the respective blocks from the FM_PID FM 355 PROFINET library otherwise you must use the FB 29 and the FB 30 You will find the description of the FB 29 and FB 30 blocks in the Appendix FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 7 1 Implementing the FM 355 in the User Program 7 2 The function block PID_FM 7 2 Use The function block PID_ FM The FM 355 is connected to the user program by means of the PID_FM FB With this FB you can change operating parameters during operation You can for example specify a setpoint value and the manipulated value or switch over to external manipulated value specification The data required for the PID_FM FB are stored in an instance DB on the CPU The PID_FM FB reads data program controlled from the FM 355 and writes data program controlled to the FM 355 The individual parameters are described in the online help and in the Assignment of DBs section Creating and Supplying an Instance DB Call 7 2 Before you program the module with the user program you have to create an instance
46. 300 and wire the external I O elements Step 1 What to do Determining the slot Slot 4 to 11 in Rack 0 Slot 4 to 11 in Rack 1 Slot 4 to 11 in Rack 2 Slot 4 to 11 in Rack 3 S aal Installing the FM 355 Switch the CPU to STOP mode Remove the neighboring module and plug in the bus connector Hook in the FM 355 onto the rail and screw it tight Clip on the slot number Install the shield contact element aala Wiring the FM 355 Analog inputs left hand front connector Digital inputs right hand front connector Analog outputs only continuous action controllers right hand front connector Digital outputs only step controllers right hand front connector Wiring the supply voltage 24 V supply voltage L right hand front connector Pin 1 Mass of supply voltage M right hand front connector Pin 20 Wiring the reference potential of the analog measuring circuit Mana left hand front connector Pin 20 NQMOOWOOOOO Front connectors The front connectors have to be latched in Shield Check the shield of the individual cables Switching the power supply on Switch on the 24 V supply for the FM 355 FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 8 1 Commissioning the FM 355 Setting Up a New Project If you want to insert the FM 355 into an existing project go to the next section If you do not have a project yet create
47. A5E00059344 03 Wiring the FM 355 5 7 Terminal assignment of the front connectors Left hand front connector Right hand front connector Con Analog Name Function Con Con Name Function nection input nection troller chan nel 16 4 IC Constantcurrent line pos 16 Q6 Digital output At step controllers Actuating Signal Down At pulse controllers Manipulated value B 17 IC Constantcurrent line neg 17 4 Q7 Digital output At step controllers Manipulated value signal up At pulse controllers Manipulated value A 18 M Measuring line pos 18 Q8 Digital output At step controllers Actuating Signal Down At pulse controllers Manipulated value B 19 M Measuring line neg 19 20 Mana Reference point of the 20 M Mass of the supply voltage 24 V DC analog circuit Note The Mana connection has to be connected with low impedance to the central ground connection If you supply the encoders externally you must also connect the ground of this external voltage with the ground of the CPU Supply voltage L M A Connect a direct voltage of 24 V to the L and M terminals for the power supply of the modules and of the digital outputs Caution Only extra low voltage lt 60 V DC separated safely from the system may be used for the 24 V DC power supply Safe isolation can be implemented by one of the following requirements e VDE 0100
48. Controller oscillates Attenuation too good By increasing the TD is there a noticeable improvement in the attenutation no Reverse the GAIN and TD until the transition function has a 5 overshoot a Overshoot gt 5 yes Target Overshoot 5 reached no Figure 2 12 Setting the controller by means of targeted experimentation FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 2 23 Information for the controller adjustment 2 8 Establishing parameters by experiment Optimum controller setting 0 5T MD Dopt MD 2TDopt TI 0 5 TI opt TGAIN 0 5 GAINopt TGAIN 2 GAIN opt Figure 2 13 Effects on the optimum controller setting when changing the controller parameters FM 355 closed loop control module 2 24 Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 How Does the FM 355 Control 3 3 1 Basic Structure of the FM 355 Introduction This section uses block diagrams to explain the basic structure and the interconnection possibilities of the FM 355 Basic Structure of the FM 355 FM 355 C and FM 355 S have a similar basic structure It consists of the following function blocks e Inputs of the FM 355 4 analog inputs with analog value conditioning 1 reference junction input for compensating thermocouples 8 digital inputs e Controller 4 controller channels independent of each other each subdi
49. Disturbance at very small dead time time delay time delay time Higher order Not suitable Not suitable Slightly worse Control La FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Information for the controller adjustment 2 4 Choosing the controller structure with a given control section Table 2 1 Suitable Controller for the Most Important Control Variables Controller P PD PI PID Controlled variable Steady state control deviation No steady state control deviation Temperature for less demands Well suited The most suitable controller types for and with P high quality requirements except for sections with Tu specially adapted special controllers Tg lt 0 1 Pressure Suitable if the Unsuitable The most suitable controller types for delay time is high quality requirements except for inconsiderable specially adapted special controllers Flow rate If suitable Unsuitable Suitable but l Hardly required for because required action controller these control GAIN range alone often better variables usually too large FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 2 15 Information for the controller adjustment 2 5 Setting the Controller Characteristic Values Optimization 2 5 Rule of Thumb for the Parameter Setting Setting the Controller Characteristic Values Optimization Controller struc
50. FM 355 Control tasks frag ES Index 2 Controlled system Characteristic values 2 1 Critical non critical 3 41 Optimize 8 3 Controlled systems Types Controller Cascade option 3 37 Continuous action self tuning Step and pulse controller Type 3 Controller module Properties Controller module inputs 3 4 Controller output 3 21 Analog output 3 23 Continuous action controller Functions Step controller with without a position feedback signal 3 25 Step controller pulse mode Controller parameters Saving in EEPROM Controllers Structure Controllers of the FM 355 CPU stop CSA approval B 1 D Data management Dead band 3 20 Dead time 3 Determining System parameters for 2 3 step controllers hJ System parameters for cooling controllers Time response from step response 2 Determining the controller parameters Example Diagnostic data record Diagnostic interrupt Default setting Diagnostic LEDs Meaning Diagnostics interrupt 1 3 Diagnostics record FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Index Diagnostics record DSO Assignment 12 3 Diagnostics record DS1 Assignment Diagnostics text 12 3 Differential input Signal selection Digital inputs Cables 5 8 Input filters 5 6 Number Operating modes Properties 9 1 Shield 5 8 Wiring and block diagrams Digital outputs 5 6 Connecting loads actuators Number of the
51. Function nection input nection troller chan nel 1 1 L 24V DC supply voltage 2 1 IC Constantcurrent line pos 2 11 Digital input 3 IC Constantcurrent line neg 3 12 Digital input 4 M Measuring line pos 4 13 Digital input 5 M Measuring line neg 5 14 Digital input 6 2 IC Constantcurrent line pos 6 15 Digital input 7 IC Constantcurrent line neg 7 16 Digital input 8 M Measuring line pos 8 I7 Digital input 9 M Measuring line neg 9 18 Digital input 10 COMP Reference junction input 10 pos 11 COMP Reference junction input 11 1 Q1 Digital output 7 neg At step controllers Manipulated value signal up At pulse controllers Manipulated value A 12 3 IC Constantcurrent line pos 12 Q2__ Digital output At step controllers Actuating Signal Down At pulse controllers Manipulated value B 13 IC Constantcurrent line neg 13 2 Q3__ Digital output At step controllers Manipulated value signal up At pulse controllers Manipulated value A 14 M Measuring line pos 14 Q4 Digital output At step controllers Actuating Signal Down At pulse controllers Manipulated value B 15 M Measuring line neg 15 3 Q5 Digital output At step controllers Manipulated value signal up At pulse controllers Manipulated value A FM 355 closed loop control module 5 4 Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006
52. In the type English values setting parameter assign ment screen form COM_RST BOOL Read parameters TRUE Ifthe parameter from system data COM_RST TRUE is set the PID PAR FB carries out an initialization run In the process the parameters are read from the system data of the CPU and saved in the instance DB 2 0 MOD_ADDR_ INT FM 355 455 256 The module address module address that resulted from the configuration with STEP 7 is given at this input 4 0 CHANNEL INT Channel Number 1to4 1 The number of the controller channel to which the instance DB is referenced is configured at input channel number 6 0 INDEX_R INT Index for REAL 0 to 48 0 0 Refer to the section parameter The PID_PAR Function Block 8 0 12 0 VALUE_R REAL Value for REAL Depending onthe 0 0 Refer to the section parameter respective The PID_PAR parameter Function Block INDEXI INT Index for INT 0 49 to 61 0 0 Refer to the section parameter The PID_PAR Function Block FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 11 31 Assignment of the Instance DBs 77 6 Instance DB of the PID_PAR FB Addr Parameter Data Comment Permitted range of Default Explanation In the type English values setting parameter assign ment screen form 14 0 VALUE_ INT Value for INT Dependin
53. Parameter optimization with temperature controllers Page 3 41 Introduction Page FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 3 27 How Does the FM 355 Control 3 5 Outputs of the FM 355 3 5 Outputs of the FM 355 Analog Outputs of the FM 355 C You can carry out the following specifications through parameter configuration for each analog output of the FM 355 C e Signal selection e Signal type The output parameters are configured in the Signal selection analog output and Signal type analog output masks Signal Selection at the Analog Outputs With the signal selection you can specify which signal value is to be output at the respective analog output The following signal values can be assigned e The value zero e The conditioned analog value of the four analog inputs e Manipulated value A of one of the four controller channels e Manipulated value B of one of the four controller channels Signal Type at the Analog Outputs You can determine the signal type for each analog output The following signal types can be assigned e Current output 0 mA to 20 mA e Current output 4 mA to 20 mA e Voltage output 0 V to 10 V e Voltage output 10 V to 10 V FM 355 closed loop control module 3 28 Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 How Does the FM 355 Control Digital Outputs of the FM 355 S 3 5 Outputs of the FM 355 The digital outputs of the FM 35
54. Part 410 HD 384 4 41 IEC 364 4 41 as functional low voltage with safe isolation e VDE 0805 EN 60950 IEC 950 as safety extra low voltage SELV e VDE 0106 Part 101 An integral diode protects the module from reverse polarity of the supply voltage FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 5 5 Wiring the FM 355 5 7 Terminal assignment of the front connectors Input Filters for Digital Inputs Digital outputs In order to suppress disturbances digital inputs 11 to 18 have input filters RC elements with a uniform filter time of 1 5 ms The FM 355 S disposes of eight digital outputs Q1 to Q8 that are used to directly trigger control processes The digital outputs are supplied via the supply voltage L The digital outputs are source outputs and can be loaded with a load current of 0 1 A They are protected from overload and short circuit Note Direct connection of inductivities such as relays and contactors is possible without external circuiting If SIMATIC output circuits can be deactivated by additionally installed contacts for example relay contacts you have to provide additional overvoltage protection devices at inductivities see the following example for overvoltage protection Overvoltage Protection Example 5 6 The following figure shows an output circuit that requires additional overvoltage protection devices SIMATIC S7 control
55. Repeated manipulated value on FALSE The output position feedback on shows the set mode step controller with position feedback or step controller without position feedback 124 6 QFUZZY BOOL PID algorithm 0 fuzzy 1 FALSE If the output PID algorithm 0 Fuzzy 1 is set the controller operates with the fuzzy algorithm 11 48 FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Assignment of the Instance DBs 11 8 Assignment of the DBs for Operator Control and Monitoring via OP Addr 124 7 Parameter QSPLEPV Data type BOOL Comment English Fuzzy display Setpoint lt process variable Permitted range of values Default setting FALSE Explanation The output Display of FUZZY controller set value lt actual value is set when the fuzzy controller is switched on if the set value is less than the effective actual value In the para meter assign ment screen form 125 0 QSPR BOOL Split range operation FALSE If the output Split range operation is set the continuous controller is operating in split range mode 125 1 QLMNUP BOOL Manipulated signal up FALSE Is the output Manipulated value signal up For step controllers or pulse controllers only 125 2 QLMNDN BOOL Manipulated signal down FALSE Is the output
56. Start of input signal End of input signal signal range range Figure 3 25 Split range function two step controllers In the case of a three point controller for example as a heating and cooling controller the statements above apply for the manipulated value A The second signal for controlling the cooling is formed via the manipulated value B The conversion of the manipulated value to the manipulated values A and B is shown in the figure below The conversion to a binary output signal is carried out so that the ratio of pulse length to period duration corresponds to the manipulated values A and B at the assigned digital outputs The classification of the digital outputs to the controller channels can be found in the table Functions of the controller output and setting possibilities Manipulated variables A and B Manipulated variable A output signals Manipulated variable B start of output signal range Da Manipulated variable B Manipulated variable LMN input Manipulated variable B start of input signal range Manipulated variable B end of input signal range Manipulated variable B end of output signal range signal Figure 3 26 Split range function three step controller FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 How Does the FM 355 Control 3 4 Controller Controller Output of the Step Controller
57. With a multiple loop ratio control the relationship of the two process variables PV1 and PV2 is kept constant To do this the setpoint of the 2nd control circuit is calculated from the control variable of the 1st control circuit Even with a dynamic change to the process variable PV 1 it is ensured that the specified relationship is maintained Reference variable Section Setpoint Square root The reference variable specifies the desired value or course of the process variables of interest Your current value is gt setpoint SP gt control section The setpoint is the value that the control variable should adopt from the effects of a controller gt square root extraction Square root extraction Standardization With the square root function SQRT quadratic associations can be linearized The standardization is a procedure algorithm for converting standardizing the physical values of a process variable into the internally processed percentage value of the control and then converting the other way round to the output The standardization line is established by the start value and the end value FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Glossary 5 Glossary Step and pulse controller The step and pulse controller is a virtually constant controller with two binary output signals The step controller serves to drive the integrated elements e g step motor for openin
58. a new project under STEP 7 so that configuration with the parameter configuration mask is possible Step What to do v 1 Create a new project under STEP 7 o 2 Create a new rack o 3 Enter your hardware structure in the rack in HW Config o 4 Select the FM 355 from the module catalog and drag it to the selected slot o 5 Write down the module address that is now displayed This value is required for when preparing the instance DB er 6 Now call the parameter configuration masks for the FM 355 by double clicking the o FM 355 order number Now go to the Parameter Configuration section Inserting an FM 355 into an Existing Project If you want to insert an FM 355 into a SIMATIC 300 station of an existing project proceed as follows Step What to do v 1 Open the SIMATIC 300 station of your existing project qo 2 Select the FM 355 from the module catalog and drag it to the selected slot o 3 Write down the module address that is now displayed This value is required for when preparing the instance DB 2 4 Now call the parameter configuration masks for the FM 355 by double clicking the o FM 355 order number Parameter Configuration Configure the module Step What to do s 1 Fill out the masks of the basic configuration e In the interrupt selection specify whether the FM 355 is to trigger interrupts o 2 Click the Parameters button o 3 Fill out the dialog boxes o Save the pa
59. accordance with the above mentioned EU Directive Article 10 Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Bereich Automatisierungs und Antriebstechnik A amp D AS RD ST PLC Postfach 1963 D 92209 Amberg FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Introduction Position in the Information Landscape This manual is a component of the S7 300 and ET 200M documentation System S7 300 Documentation S7 300 Automation systems Structure CPU Data S7 300 M7 300 Automation systems Module specifications S7 300 Operation List ET 200M ET 200M Distributed I O Device S7 300 M7 300 Automation systems Module Specifications The manual contains the following guides which provide quick access to the specific e At the beginning of the manual you can find a comprehensive list of contents e Following the appendices you will find a glossary in which important technical terms used e The manual closes with a list of references and a detailed index for quick access to the Guide information you need in the manual are defined information you require Further Support If you have any questions concerning the use of products which are not answered in this manual please contact your local Siemens partner at your Siemens office A list of Siemens representatives worldwide is contained for example in the appendix entitled Siemens Worldwide of the manual S7 300 Automation systems Con
60. actuating o time Test gt Measure motor actuating time only at step controllers 3 Call up the controller optimization o Test gt Controller optimization 4 Carry out the controller optimization steps o 5 Monitoring and controlling the control loop using the loop monitor o Test gt Loop monitor 6 Monitor the control loop using the curve recorder o Test gt Curve recorder FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 8 3 Commissioning the FM 355 Saving the Project When you have carried out all the tests successfully and the FM 355 configuration is optimized you have to save the data again Step What to do Jv 1 Save all the data in the parameter configuration interface by using File gt Save o 2 Terminate the parameter configuration interface o 3 Save the project via the File gt Save menu o 4 Transfer the data to the CPU in the STOP mode via the Download to PLC o menu 5 Switch the CPU to the RUN mode o See also Installing and Removing the FM 355 Page iring front connectors Page FM 355 closed loop control module 8 4 Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Properties of Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs 9 1 Properties of the Digital Inputs and Outputs Step Controllers Properties The digital inputs and outputs of the FM 355 S have the following properties Special Feature 8 inputs 8 outp
61. always interconnect the reference point Mana of the measuring circuit with terminal M of the CPU Wire the Mana terminal to the M terminal of the CPU Any potential difference between Mana and the M terminal of the CPU could otherwise corrupt the analog signal FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 10 1 Connecting Measuring Transducers and Loads Actuators 10 1 Connecting Measuring Transducers to Analog Inputs Abbreviations Used The abbreviations used in the figures below have the following meaning M Measuring line positive M Measuring line negative Mana Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit M Ground terminal L Power supply 24 V DC Ucm Potential difference between inputs and the reference potential of measuring circuit Mana Connecting measuring sensors to analog inputs No potential difference gt Ucm common mode voltage may occur between the measuring lines M of the input channels and the reference point of measuring circuit Mana In order for the permitted value not to be exceeded you have to carry out different measures depending on the potential connection of the sensor insulated non insulated The steps you have to take are described in this chapter Isolated Measuring Transducers 10 2 The isolated measuring transducers are not connected to the local ground potential They can be operated in electrically isolated mode Depending on lo
62. an FM 355 and several signal modules Figure 1 2 SIMATIC S7 300 configuration with an FM 355 Programming device PG with STEP 7 and the parameter configuration masks FM 355 CPU with application program and FBs of the FM 355 FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 1 9 Product Overview 7 5 FM 355 Software FM 355 closed loop control module 1 10 Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Information for the controller adjustment 2 1 Characteristic Values of the Controlled System Determining the Time Response from the Step Response Time response of the controlled system can be determined by the time sequence of Controlled variable x after an abrupt change of Manipulated variable y from 0 to 100 Y 4 100 T Yh X max Ks o Ts FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Information for the controller adjustment 2 1 Characteristic Values of the Controlled System X max Xh lt _ _ t Tu Figure 2 1 Step response of a controlled system 100 ON 0 OFF Most of the controlled systems are so called controlled systems with self regulation refer to the figure above The time response can be determined by approximation using the variables Delay time Tu Recovery time Tg and Maximum value Xmax The variables are determin
63. control and monitoring Via OP assignment of the DBs Via PID_FM FB 3 33 with the OP 3 33 Order Number Information location FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Order Numbers FM 355 Outputs of the FM 355 5 6 Overvoltage protection 5 P P action control 3 17 P action controller 2 7 Parameter Parameter assignment 6 2 Parameter configuration 3 30 8 2 Data flow 3 Parameter configuration data Back up 8 8 3 Transfer 8 Parameter configuration interface 1 8 3 30 Technical specifications B 10 Parameter optimization Temperature controller 3 42 Parameter setting interface installing 61 Parameterization screens integrated help Parameters downloading directly PD control PD action controller Time lag of the D action PD action in feedback PI control 3 18 Pl action controller 2 10 PID_FM Action of the input parameters 7 8 For monitoring 7 For operation Generating output parameters 7 11 Purpose 7 2 To change parameters 7 5 PID_FM FB Action of the input parameters 7 8 For oe For operation 7 3 Generating Ea z aa 7 11 Instance DB 11 1 Parameters oo al ea configuration interface 7 7 Purpose To change parameters 7 5 PID_PAR Changeable parameters 7 25 Index 5 Index Changing values Purpose PID_PAR FB Changeable parameters Changing values 7 24 Instance DB Purpose PID action control 3 19 PID action c
64. control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 2 9 Information for the controller adjustment 2 3 Control Response at Different Feedback Structures Pl action Controller A x Step function on the controller input gt Input variable t A y Step response of the continuous controller gt Output variable t A y 100 Step response of the pulse controller 0 Output variable t Figure 2 7 Jump response of a Pl action controller l action control elements have the integral of the input variable as the output variable i e the controller totals the deviation from the setpoint value for the duration This means that the controller continues to adjust until the deviation from the setpoint value has been eliminated In practical experience a combination of the various timing elements is ideal depending on the requirements placed on the control response The time response of the individual elements can be described by the controller parameters Proportional band GAIN Reset time TI I action and Differential action time TD D action FM 355 closed loop control module 2 10 Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Information for the controller adjustment 2 3 Control Response at Different Feedback Structures Equation for Pl action controller The following applies for the jump response of the Pl action controller in the time range 1 y GAIN x x x 1
65. curve FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 2 21 Information for the controller adjustment 2 7 Determining the System Parameters for Pure Cooling Controllers You can then determine the following parameters from the curve Tu Delay time in s Sx Maximum ascent of the cooling curve in C s Tini Initial temperature in C In addition the temperature Tcooi in C of the cooling medium has to be determined Determining the controller parameters The sampling time _ Ta is determined by the conversion time of the FM 355 You can read off a Ta ms the Ta in the parameter configuration interface Button Module parameters 230 C b GAIN of C 200 C Ty FCI Talms 200 C Sie i 7 m a T Tant Cl Tk nl C 2000S Ta ms A c Tas Tyls x 6 66 1000 ms s Ta ms d To s Tyls x 0 6 1000 es s FM 355 closed loop control module 2 22 Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Information for the controller adjustment 2 8 Procedure 2 8 Establishing parameters by experiment Establishing parameters by experiment As an alternative to calculating the parameters you can establish the control parameters by means of targeted experimentation Start point GAIN small TDO or small TI TD 0 means Path is switched off Excitation On account of a jump like GAIN 4 setpoint change Poor attenuation yes
66. element for example The following figure shows details for the connection of analog signals Shield on the shield Shield on contact element housing connec tion 4 Front connector A A A MANA ma Figure 5 5 ee twisted a7 Connection of analog signals Terminal 20 Mana of the front connector has to be connected with low impedance to the CPU ground If you supply the encoder with an external voltage you must also connect the ground of this external voltage with the CPU ground e Use flexible cables with cross sections of 0 25 to 1 5 mm2 e You do not need wire end ferrules If you use wire end ferrules then use only those without insulation collar in accordance with DIN 46228 Form A short version Note Analog inputs that are not used are to be short circuited and connected to Mana 5 8 FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Wiring the FM 355 Wiring 5 2 Wiring front connectors Proceed as follows when wiring the front connector 1 2 3 Place the front connector in the wiring position and open the front panel Strip the conductors length 6 mm Do you want to use end ferrules If yes Press the end ferrules and the cables together 4 Feed the enclosed strain relief clamp into the front connector 5 If the wires leave the module at the bottom begin wiring at the bottom otherwise be
67. in the MOD_ADDR parameter The module address of the FM 355 is determined by the configuration of your hardware Take the start address from HW Config 3 Enter the channel number of the corresponding controller channel 1 2 3 or 4 in the CHANNEL parameter for each instance DB 4 Store the instance DBs You can also supply the values of MOD_ADDR and CHANNEL when you call up the block Start and Initialization FB 29 PID_PAR must be started in the same watchdog OB as all other FBs that access the same FM 355 FB 29 PID_PAR requires an initialization run it is automatically triggered if the system data SDB default data of the FM 355 has not yet been read from the FB29 PID_PAR You can also start the initialization yourself with COM_RST TRUE which is usually done in OB100 since the system data is sent to the FM 355 after STOP RUN of the CPU The initialization process lasts several cycles No data is sent to the FM 355 via SFC 58 during the initialization COM_RST TRUE The block automatically resets the COM_RST parameter after the initialization When the FM 355 is used in distributed I O it may take several start cycles for the parameters to be completely sent to the FM 355 via SFC 58 The BUSY parameter has the value TRUE as long as the transmission is ongoing To change the parameters you should call the block repeatedly over several cycles until BUSY FALSE and RET_VALU 0 FM 355 closed loop control module Operating
68. initialization The parameters are read from the system data of the CPU and saved in the instance DB The block sets COM_RST automatically COM_RST is usually set to TRUE in OB100 by the user In the parameter assignment screen form A 14 FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 FB 29 and FB 30 A 5 List of RET_VALU messages RET_VALU messages A 5 List of RET_VALU messages JOB_ERR JOB_ERR JOB_ERR Meaning Hex Dec Int 7000 28672 32624 First call with REQ 0 no data transmission active BUSY has the value 0 7001 28673 32624 First call with REQ 1 data transmission initiated BUSY has the value 1 7002 28674 32624 Interim call REQ irrelevant Data transmission already active BUSY has the value 1 8090 32912 32624 Specified logical base address invalid There is no assignment in the SDB1 SDB2x or it is not a base address 80A0 32928 32608 Negative acknowledgment when reading from the module Module was removed during the read operation or the module is defective 80A1 32929 32607 Negative acknowledgment when writing to the module Module was removed during the write operation or the module is defective 80A2 32930 32606 DP protocol error at layer 2 80A3 32931 32605 DP protocol error in user interface user 80A4 32932 32604 Communication bus error 80B1 329
69. operation and maintenance Trademarks All names identified by are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described Since variance cannot be precluded entirely we cannot guarantee full consistency However the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions Siemens AG Order No A5E00059344 03 Copyright Siemens AG 2006 Automation and Drives Edition 02 2006 Technical data subject to change Postfach 48 48 90437 N RNBERG GERMANY Introduction Preface Purpose of This Manual This manual describes all the steps that are required to use the FM 355 function module It supports rapid and effective familiarization with the FM 355 functionality Contents of the Manual This manual describes the hardware and software of the FM 355 It consists of an instruction section and contains reference material appendices The following subjects are covered e Fundamentals of controlling e Installing and removing the FM 355 e Wiring the FM 355 e Assigning parameters to the FM 355 e Programming the FM 355 e Appendixes Target Group This manual is intended for the following t
70. parameter of the FUZ_355 FB in the start up of the CPU and then call the block conditionally in the cyclic program as long as LOAD_PAR TRUE If the LOAD_PAR TRUE parameter is set then the FB writes the parameters of all the temperature controllers of the FM 355 from the instance DB to the FM 355 After a successful transmission of the parameters the FB PID_FM sets the LOAD_PAR parameter to FALSE This can take a few call cycles if the FM 355 is used in distributed I Os When the temperature controller parameters are read a parameter configuration error of the temperature controller parameters is displayed in the PARAFFUZ parameter as follows High byte of PARAFFUZ not euqal to zero means that a parameter configuration error exists The low byte contains the byte offset of the incorrect parameter referenced to the beginning of the static variables For example PARAFFUZ W 16 0104 means that the second parameter is incorrect The error display can only be displayed if you manipulate the temperature controller parameters in the instance DB and write to the FM 355 You can also read out these parameter assignment errors by using the PLC gt Parameter Assignment Error menu of the parameter configuration interface The output parameter RET_VALU contains the feedback value RET_VAL of the SFCs RD_REC and WR_REC With the blocks for PROFINET operation the RET_VAL includes the 2nd and 3rd bytes of the STATUS parameter of the SFB RDREC and WRREC
71. parameters W 16 3130 W 16 3130 The out_par parameter may not be overwritten by the user It marks the start of the output parameter that is read by the module if READ_VAR TRUE is set 10 0 SP REAL Setpoint Technical range of values physical variable 0 0 The setpoint value that is currently in effect is available at the Setpoint output 14 0 PV REAL Process variable Technical range of values physical variable 0 0 The effective process variable is output at the process variable output 18 0 ER REAL Error signal Technical range of values physical variable 0 0 The effective negative deviation is output at the Negative deviation output 22 0 DISV REAL FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Disturbance variable 100 0 100 0 0 0 The effective disturbance variable is output at the Disturbance variable output Assignment of the Instance DBs 11 1 Instance DB of the PIDLFM FB Addr Parameter Data Comment Permitted range of Default Explanation In the type English values setting parameter assign ment screen form 26 0 LMN REAL Manipulated 100 0 100 0 0 0 The effective value manipulated value is output at the Manipulated value output At a step controller without analog position feedback the unlimited
72. range of Default Explanation In the type English values setting parameter assign ment screen form 60 0 MTR_TM REAL Motor manipulated MTR_TM gt 0 001 60 0 The actuating time Pulse 1 value s from end stop to end shaper stop of the control controller valve is entered in the Motor actuating time parameter For step controllers only 64 0 PULSE_TM REAL Minimum pulse gt 0 0 0 2 A minimum pulse Pulse 1 time s length can be shaper configured on the controller minimum pulse time Split parameter range applies to step function P controllers or pulse ulse controllers only generator controller 68 0 BREAK_TM REAL Minimum break gt 0 0 0 2 A minimum pulse Pulse 1 time s duration can be shaper assigned with the controller parameter Minimum Split break time range applies to step function P controllers or pulse ulse controllers only generator controller 72 0 SP_RE REAL External setpoint Technical range of 0 0 An external setpoint 2 values is connected to the physical variable controller at the external setpoint input 76 0 LMN_RE REAL External 100 0 100 0 0 0 An external 2 manipulated value manipulated value is interconnected to the controller at the input External manipulated value 80 0 LMNRSVAL REAL Start value of the 100 0 100 0 0 0 The configuration tool 2 repeated has access to the manipulated value input Start value of in simulation the simulated position
73. signal 0 End of range output signal 100 Manipulated value B Start of range input signal 100 End of range input signal 0 Start of range output signal 100 End of range output signal 0 FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Information for the controller adjustment 2 7 Procedure 2 7 Determining the System Parameters for Pure Cooling Controllers Determining the System Parameters for Pure Cooling Controllers You can record the cooling down behavior of the temperature controlled system by means of a recording unit see figure below To do this proceed as follows 1 Enter uncritical control parameters GAIN 1 0 Ti To 0 0 Set the manipulated value to manual operation 3 Specify the manipulated value 0 via the loop monitor 4 Let the temperature settle to the operating temperature by feeding external heating energy for example through adjacent heating zones Specify the setpoint temperature 0 C via the loop monitor 1 Set the manipulated value to controller operation gt The module switches on the cooling Note During the cooling down process the external heating energy supply must remain constant For example the adjacent heating zones have to be heated with a constant manipulated variable Temperature Mant Cooling down curve Time Figure 2 11 Determined cooling down
74. the PID_FM FB ORed with digital input 1 to 8 INT Selection of the signal for changeover of the manipulated value of the controller to 59 LMN_RE 0 Only specification via LMN_REON parameter of the PID_FM FB 1 to 8 Specification via LMN_REON parameter of the PID_FM FB ORed with digital input 1 to 8 INT Selection of the upper endstop signal of the position feedback 60 0 Only specification via LMNRHSRE parameter of the PID_FM FB 1 to 8 Specification via LMNRHSRE parameter of the PID_FM FB ORed with digital input 1 to 8 INT Selection of the lower endstop signal of the position feedback 61 0 Only specification via LMNRLSRE parameter of the PID_FM FB 1 to 8 Specification via LMNRLSRE parameter of the PID_FM FB ORed with digital input 1 to 8 Note The FB 39 PID_PAR from the FM 355 455 PID Control library uses the SFC 54 RD_DPARM Therefore you can only use the FB PID_PAR in the CPUs listed in the following table FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 7 27 Implementing the FM 355 in the User Program 7 7 The PID_PAR function block Table 7 2 List of the CPUs in which the PID_PAR FB can be used CPU Order No CPU 312IFM 6ES7 312 5AC01 0ABO CPU 313 6ES7 313 1AD02 0ABO CPU 314 6ES7 314 1AE03 0ABO CPU 314IFM 6ES7 314 5AE02 0ABO CPU 315 6ES7 315 1AF02 0ABO CPU 315DP 6ES
75. the index numbers contained in the table that you specify at the parameter INDEX_R or INDEX_I in the instance DB of the PID_PAR FB If the input COM_RST TRUE the FB reads the parameters from the system data are stores them in static variables The parameters to be changed are overwritten there and the complete data record then transferred to the FM Since the FB thus has its own data management for the parameters in its static variables further parameters can also be changed To this purpose you have to call up the same instance DB several times consecutively with COM_RST FALSE and with different index numbers The parameter COM_RST is an input parameter that is not reset by the FB PID_PAR FB The output parameter RET_VALU contains the feedback value RET_VAL of the SFCs RD_REC and WR_REC With the blocks for PROFINET operation the RET_VAL includes the 2nd and 3rd bytes of the STATUS parameter of the SFB RDREC and WRREC The values of RET_VALU are described in the reference manual 2 If the FM 355 is used in distributed I Os it may take a few call cycles until the parameters have been transferred to the FM 355 The parameter BUSY has the value TRUE until the transfer has been completed You should therefore repeatedly call the FB PID_PAR when changing parameters until BUSY FALSE and RET_VALU 0 Note Please note that parameters that you have changed using the PID_PAR FB are overwritten by the parameters from the system data
76. to change these factors during runtime it is possible to do this via the FB PID_PAR Preparing the set point net SH 4 Eg rmk Setpoint J Effective set point Switching Ramp Limiting safety set point Error signal Totalizing Factor for process value B LAA Process value Factor for process value C PV 1 Offset gt hee e Process value Process value _ Effective process value Process value B Process value yae Process value C bd D input ee S Disturbance variable Figure 13 14 Realizing the total amount controller main controller The slave controllers are configured as ratio mixed controllers The example of the component PV1 in the figure below shows their interconnection The mixing factor FAC is specified by the set value input of the FB PID_FM SP_RE or SP_OP FM 355 closed loop control module 13 14 Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Examples 13 6 Interconnection example for a mixed control In the slave controller mixed controller the manipulated variable of the main controller is standardized from the value range 0 to then further processed as the set value 100 to the value range of the actual value A and is D
77. via the parameter configuration interface and transferred via the system data to the FM 355 Changing controller parameters using the PID_FM FB is advisable if you want to change these during operation depending on the process states Proceed as follows 1 Set the COM_RST parameter of the FB PID_FM to TRUE in the start up of the CPU The FB then reads all the controller parameters from the FM 355 and places them in its instance DB The instance DB of the PID_FM FB is now compared with the parameters of the parameter configuration interface system data After successful reading of the parameters the PID_FM FB sets the COM_RST parameter to FALSE This can take a few call cycles if the FM 355 is used in distributed I Os If COM_RST FALSE you can now change individual controller parameters in the instance DB of the PID_FM FB in the user program To do so call the PID_FM FB by setting LOAD_PAR TRUE The PID_FM FB then transfers all the controller parameters from the instance DB to the FM After successful transfer of the parameters the PID_FM FB resets the LOAD_PAR parameter This can take a few call cycles if the FM 355 is used in distributed I Os Note Please note that the parameters in the FM 355 are always overwritten by the values from the system data whenever the CPU is started up transition from STOP to RUN Operator Control and Monitoring of the FM 355 Page 3 33 FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instr
78. 0 The D element in the control 1 the controller PID algorithm can be deviation placed at a separate input This is selected controller 1 Control parameters Control parameters are downloaded to the module if the I O parameter LOAD_PAR is set All the control parameters are loaded permanently to the EEPROM of the FM 355 2 Operating parameters Operating parameters are downloaded to the module if the I O parameter LOAD_OP is set Only the setpoint SP_RE of the operator parameters is loaded permanently to the EEPROM of the FM 355 All the other operator parameters have the values 0 or FALSE pre assigned during the FM 355 startup 11 42 Note The EEPROM of the module could be destroyed by excessive writing processes In order to prevent this the module delays renewed writing to the EEPROM by 30 minutes FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Assignment of the Instance DBs 11 8 Assignment of the DBs for Operator Control and Monitoring via OP Output Parameters Table 11 17 Output parameters of the DBs for operator control and monitoring Addr Parameter Data Comment Permitted range of Default Explanation In the type English values setting para meter assign ment screen form 94 0 SP REAL Setpoint Technical range of 0 0 The setpoint value that values is currently in effect is physical variable available at the Setpoint o
79. 0 ms READ_355 526 bytes 644 bytes 66 bytes 2 5 ms 2 2 ms CH_DIAG 302 bytes 420 bytes 64 bytes 2 3 ms 2 1 ms FUZ_355 356 bytes 464 bytes 22 bytes 2 1 ms 1 9ms PID_PAR 918 bytes 1074 bytes 24 bytes 4 3 to 8 ms 3 8 to 7 2 ms Depending on whether INDEX_R and INDEX_I are both 0 CJ_T_PAR 274 bytes 354 bytes 22 bytes 1 8 ms 1 6 ms Table B 2 Processing times of the PID_FM at various conditions Conditions Processing time in READ_VAR LOAD_OP LOAD_PAR CPU 314 CPU 414 2 DP FALSE FALSE FALSE 0 65 ms 0 077 ms TRUE FALSE FALSE 2 85 ms 2 36 ms TRUE FALSE 4 56 ms 4 48 ms FALSE FALSE TRUE 3 75 ms 2 59 ms TRUE FALSE TRUE 5 95 ms 5 15 ms TRUE TRUE 7 66 ms 7 1 ms If LOAD_OP TRUE READ_VAR is also set to TRUE by the PID_FM FB Table B 3 Technical specifications of the instance DBs Instance DBs of the function Assignment in blocks RAM Load memory PID_FM 190 bytes 490 bytes FORCE355 64 bytes 214 bytes READ_355 78 bytes 184 bytes CH_DIAG 72 bytes 178 bytes FUZ_355 80 bytes 172 bytes PID_PAR 290 bytes 410 bytes CJ_T_PAR 58 bytes 130 bytes FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 B 9 Data Sheet B 4 Technical Data of Parameter Contiguration Interface B 4 Technical Data of Parameter Configuration Interface Parameter Configuration Interface Technical specifications Required memory hard disk Parameter configuration interface 4 Mbytes
80. 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 3 31 How Does the FM 355 Control 3 6 Functional mechanisms and data storage in the FM 355 Connecting the FM 355 with the User Program 3 32 If you want to change controller parameters for example controller gain integration coefficient of the FM 355 from a user program or by operation at the programming device you have to use the PID_FM FB You assign an instance data block to this FB for each control channel that you want to use If the LOAD_PAR parameter is set when the PID_FM FB is called up via the user program all the controller parameters of the FB are transferred to the FM 355 Controller parameters are all the parameters that lie after the cont_par variable in the instance data block The parameters in the instance DB have a default setting These default settings can be modified using the STL LAD editor Note In order to ensure that you do not overwrite the parameters that you do not want to change by the default values from the instance DB you must first call the PID_FM FB once with COM_RST TRUE during the CPU start up The PID_FB FB then reads the parameters that were transferred beforehand from the CPU into the FM out of the FM 355 and places them in its instance DB You can now change individual parameters and transfer all the parameters to the FM 355 with LOAD_PAR TRUE Please note that the parameters in the FM 355 are always overwritten by the values from the system data wheneve
81. 11 33 Sea and supplir FA FIA FG FAG Creating and supplying 7 2 7 14 7 16 7 18 For OP 11 13 11 35 Internal errors 12 1 Interrupt 3 14 L Labeling strips Limiting Normalizing Line frequenc Adapting 35 Lines For analog signals 10 1 Loads Connecting to analog output hota Connecting to digital output M Manipulated value At restart Limit Switching of external Manipulated value correction FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Index Manipulated value limit MCE ES F Measured Ba resolution 9 3 Measuring range violation overrange Measuring range violation underrange Measuring transducer fault 3 26 3 26 12 6 tas 12 Measuring transducers at analog input Connecting Isolated 10 Non isolated Mechanical design 4 1 Mixed control Example Module Replacing in FM 355 Module address Entering in DB 7 2 7 14 7 16 7 18 7 20 7 23 29 Module view FM 355 1 Monitoring via th FB PID_FM 7 3 Mounting position 4 MPI Operator control and monitoring with OP Multiplication N Negative deviation generation Signal selection 3 13 Normalizing Limiting 3 13 O OB 82 Diagnostic interrupt 12 2 Online help Instance DB Operating modes Digital inputs FM 355 Operating parameters 11 20 11 42 11 52 Operating point for a P D action controller Operating via the FB PID_FM Operator
82. 2 2006 A5E00059344 03 Table of contents Table A 3 Input parameters of the instance DB for the FB 29 PID_PAR ccccccceeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeees Table A 4 Through parameters of the instance DB for the FB 29 PID_PAR ccssseceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeee A 9 Table A 5 Input parameters of the instance DB for the FB 30 CJ_T_PAR ccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeseseeeeees A 12 Table A 6 Output parameters of the instance DB for the FB 30 CJ_T_PAR ceccecececeececeeeeeeeeeeeeees A 13 Table A 7 Through parameters of the instance DB for the FB 30 CJ_T_PAR e c eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees A 14 Table B 1 Technical specifications of the function DIOCKS ccccceeeseeeeeeeeesscetesseesaeaeaeaeaeaeaeaeaeeeeen ees Table B 2 Processing times of the PID_FM at various CONnditiOnS ecccccceceeeeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteees Table B 3 Technical specifications of the instance DBS cccccccesecceceeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeesecaeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeee ees Table C 1 Accessories and spare Parts cececeeccecee ee eeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeceaeaeeeeeeseceaaaeeseseseeaceaeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeteaes C 1 FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 xi Table of contents FM 355 closed loop control module xii Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Product Overview 1 1 Introduction Variants of the FM 355 The FM 355 is available in the following 2 var
83. 2 53 RET_VALU can be evaluated if an error is reported via the QMOD F see reference manual 2 In the para meter assign ment screen form FM 355 closed loop control module 11 50 Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Assignment of the Instance DBs 11 8 Assignment of the DBs for Operator Control and Monitoring via OP In Out Parameters Table 11 18 1 O parameters of the DBs for operator control and monitoring Address Parameter Data Comment Permitted range of Default Explanation In the type English values setting parameter assign ment screen form 128 0 SP_INT REAL Internal setpoint Technical range of 0 0 The through values parameter internal set physical variable value serves to specify a set value by means of operating and monitoring functions 132 0 SP_OP REAL Setpoint Technical range of 0 0 The configuration tool 2 operation values loop display has physical variable access to the through parameter Setpoint operation If the bit SP_OP_ON is set the value Setpoint operation is used as the setpoint value 136 0 LMN_OP REAL Manipulated 100 0 100 0 0 0 The configuration tool 2 value operation loop display has access to the through parameter Manipulated variable operation If the bit LMNOP_ON is set the value Manipulated value operation is used as the manipulated value 140 0 SP_OP_ON BOOL Setpoint FALSE Th
84. 3611 Class Division 2 Group A B C D Warning Personal injury and material damage may be incurred In potentially explosive environments there is a risk of injury or damage if you disconnect any connectors while the S7 300 is in operation Always isolate the S7 300 operated in such areas before you disconnect and connectors FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 B 1 Data Sheet B 1 Technical Specifications S7 300 Warning A DO NOT DISCONNECT WHILE CIRCUIT IS LIVE UNLESS LOCATION IS KNOWN TO BE NONHAZARDOUS CE Marking Our products fulfill the requirements of the EU Directive 89 336 EEC Electromagnetic compatibility CE The EU conformity certificates are available for the relevant authorities and are kept at the following address in accordance with the above mentioned EU Directive Article 10 Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Bereich Automatisierungs und Antriebstechnik A amp D AS RD ST PLC Postfach 1963 D 92209 Amberg Area of Application SIMATIC products are designed for use in industrial environments SIMATIC products may be also used in combination with an individual license in residential areas residential commercial and industrial areas small enterprises Area of application Requirements in respect of PO Emitted interference Interference immunity Industry EN 50081 2 1993 EN 50082 2 1995 Observe the Installation Guidelin
85. 4 03 Connecting Measuring Transducers and Loads Actuators 10 3 Connecting Voltage Sensors Current Sensors and Resistance Thermometers Connection of Current Sensors As Four Wire Measuring Transducers Four wire measuring transducers have a separate power supply The following figure shows the connection of current sensors as 4 wire measuring transducers to an FM 355 L m M Sensor e g pressure gauge foo M 30 gt N O ao P E2 5 ADC DTT r MANA L M Figure 10 7 Connecting 4 wire measuring transducers M Logic FM 355 Processing in the FM 355 external resistance 50 Q Connection of Current Sensors As Two Wire Measuring Transducers The 2 wire measuring transducer converts the fed measured variable into a current You have to wire the supply voltage short circuit proof to the 2 wire measuring transducer Provide for a fuse as shown in the following figure 2 wire measuring transducers must be electrically isolated The following figure shows the connection of current sensors as 2 wire measuring ADC FM 355 transducers L gt Sensor e g pressure gauge Backup Lo M 3 0 N O Bis P E2 ee ES ao 42 MANA Figure 10 8 Connecting 2 wire measuring transducers FM 355 closed loop
86. 44 03 How Does the FM 355 Control 3 4 Controller Signal Selection for Setpoint Value D Action Input and Disturbance Variable You can carry out a selection amongst various signal sources for the setpoint value the actual values the value of the D action input differential input and the disturbance variable of each controller channel The following table provides an overview of the signal selection possibilities Table 3 1 Signal selection for setpoint value D action input and disturbance variable Affected values Setpoint Selectable signal source A value specified by the user program through the function block The conditioned analog value of an analog input The manipulated value of another controller channel when controllers are cascaded Actual values A B and C The conditioned analog value of an analog input Actual values B and C can also be deactivated Actual value D Zero Actual value D can also be deactivated Value for D action input only relevant for PD or PID action controllers The negative deviation after the dead band of the own controller channel The conditioned analog value of an analog input The negated effective actual value of the own controller channel Interference The conditioned analog value of an analog input the value zero can also be specified for the disturbance variable Setpoint Value Conditioning Conditioning of the setpoint value
87. 45 32591 Incorrect length specification FM_TYPE parameter in channel DB not set correctly for the module in use 80B2 32946 32590 The configured slot is not being used 80B3 32947 32589 Actual module type is not match configured module type 80C0 32960 32576 Module data not ready for reading 80C1 32961 32575 Data of a write job of the same type have not yet been processed by the module 80C2 32962 32574 The module is currently processing the maximum possible number of jobs 80C3 32963 32573 Required resources memory etc currently occupied 80C4 32964 32572 Communication error 80C5 32965 32571 Distributed I O not available 80C6 32966 32570 Priority class abort restart or background 8522 34082 31454 Channel DB or parameter DB too short The data cannot be read off the DB Write job 8532 34098 31438 DB number of the parameter DBs too high Write job 853A 34106 31430 Parameter DB not present Write job 8544 34116 31420 Error at n th n gt 1 read access to a DB after an error has occurred Write job 8723 34595 30941 Channel DB or parameter DB too short The data cannot be written to the DB Read job 8730 34608 30928 Parameter DB in the CPU is write protected The data cannot be written to the DB read job 8732 34610 30926 DB number of the parameter DBs too high Read job FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 A 15 FB 29 and FB 30
88. 5 S are used to control integrating or non integrating actuators The assignment of the digital outputs to the controller channels and their meaning are shown in the following table Table 3 3 Assignment and meaning of the digital outputs Controller Digital outputs assigned to Meaning of the digital Assignment of the digital channel the controller channel outputs at the step outputs at the pulse controller controller 1 1 Open Manipulated value A 2 Close Manipulated value B 2 3 Open Manipulated value A 4 Close Manipulated value B 3 5 Open Manipulated value A 6 Close Manipulated value B 4 7 Open Manipulated value A 8 Close Manipulated value B Open Opening the actuating device Close Closing the actuating device FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 3 29 How Does the FM 355 Control 3 6 Functional mechanisms and data storage in the FM 355 3 6 Overview Functional mechanisms and data storage in the FM 355 This chapter covers important functional mechanisms and the principle of data storage in the controller module The parameter configuration interface of the programming device PC can be used to carry out the following actions on the controller module e parameter configuration e optimizing e operator control and monitoring The PID_FM function block FB that belongs to the scope of delivery can be used t
89. 6 3 Parameter assignment What you should note with parameterization Integrated help See also The controller module checks the parameters only to the point at which a secure module function is guaranteed This applies e g for parameters that are used for address generation as well as for time dependent variables e g integration time constants gt half scanning time When the controller module detects a parameterization error then an entry is made in the DSO and DS1 of the module and the red error LED lights up You can read off parameterization errors in the Target system gt Parameterization error display menu of the parameterization interface Further tests for established thresholds or plausibility e g upper limit gt lower limit are not carried out In the parameterization interface you can select the assignment between inputs and controller channels as well as between controller channels and outputs Note the following Note The parameterization tool does not provide an error message if when assigning the controller channels to the inputs you assign two channels to one input Included in the parameterization interface is an integrated help that supports you in the parameterization of the controller module You have the following possibilities of calling the integrated help e Via the menu command Help gt Help topics e By pressing the F1 key e By clicking on the help button in the individual parameterizati
90. 65 740 7000 Fax 65 740 7001 Email simatic hotline sae siemens com sg GMT 8 00 Nuremberg SIMATIC authorization hotline SIMATIC Premium Hotline fee based only with SIMATIC Card Local time M F 7 00 a m to 5 00 p m Phone 49 911 895 7200 Fax 49 911 895 7201 Email authorization nbgm siemens de GMT 1 00 Time Mon Fri 0 00 to 24 00 Phone 49 911 895 7777 Fax 49 911 895 7001 GMT 1 00 The languages of the SIMATIC Hotlines are generally German and English in addition French Italian and Spanish are spoken on the authorization hotline vi FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Table of contents Talicele 0 c 0 PONa 1 PIOdUCt OVOMIOW voeringen eia e Ea sYaosssanlacenvsees Ean e aae a a aad da 1 1 1 1 nrod ue UO eerie a i a a a a fe 1 1 1 2 Functionality of the FM 355 ceccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeneeeeesaeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeseneeeeeseeeeeeteeeeeeenades 1 2 1 3 Areas of Application for the FM 355 ccccccceceeeesenceceeeeeeeaeaeeeeeeeseaaaeeeeeeeseseaeaeeeeeeessnnanee des 1 4 se MNS Sle cease coer ae cea ete A ed 1 5 Ia FMSS SONNE eevee Tene eT RTT me RCT TTT Retr nea a enter rare eT 1 8 2 Information for the controller adjUStMent cccccsescceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseneeeeesaneeeeceaeeneeseneeessseeeeeeeeeeseaeees 2 4 2 1 Characteristic Values of the Controlled Syste
91. 7 315 2AF02 0AB0 CPU 316 6ES7 316 1AG00 0ABO CPU 614 6ES7 614 1AH02 0AB3 CPU 412 1 6ES7 412 1XF02 0ABO CPU 412 2 6ES7 412 2XG00 0ABO CPU 413 1 6ES7 413 1XG02 0ABO CPU 413 2 6ES7 413 2XG02 0ABO CPU 414 1 6ES7 414 1XG02 0ABO CPU 414 2 6ES7 414 2XG02 0ABO CPU 414 2 6ES7 414 2XJ01 0ABO CPU 414 3 6ES7 414 3XJ00 0ABO CPU 414 3H 6ES7 414 3HJO0 0ABO CPU 416 1 6ES7 416 1XJ02 0ABO CPU 416 2 6ES7 416 2XK01 0ABO CPU 416 2 6ES7 416 2XL01 0ABO CPU 416 3 6ES7 416 3XL00 0ABO CPU 417 4 6ES7 417 4XL00 0ABO CPU 417 4H 6ES7 417 4HLOO 0ABO All future CPUs Note If you are using a new S7 300 CPU with Micro Memory Card without PROFINET connection instead of FB 39 you must use FB 29 FB 40 you must use FB 30 The descriptions of both file types used are available in the Appendix With a CPU with PROFINET connection you should use the same block from the FM_PID FM 355 PROFINET library See also Instance DB of the PID_PAR FB Page 11 31 7 28 FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Implementing the FM 355 in the User Program 7 8 The CJ_T_PAR Function Block 7 8 The CJ_T_PAR Function Block Use The CJ_T_PAR FB is used for online modification of the configured reference junction temperature This is necessary if a temperature control system with several FM 355 units with thermocouple inputs is to be operated without a Pt 100 having to be connected to each FM 355 If f
92. 7 6 Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Implementing the FM 355 in the User Program 7 2 5 Principle 7 2 6 Overview 7 2 The function block PID_FM If no error is found during the check and the parameters were read successfully from the module the COM_RST parameter is reset by the PID_FM FB Note If the FB is called at the first call with COM_RST FALSE and an invalid channel number is configured at the MOD_ADDR or CHANNEL parameters the FB accesses an incorrect I O address without any further check Saving the parameters in EEPROM In the case of program controlled reconfiguration LOAD_PAR LOAD_OP of the controller module by the FB PID_FM the time thereof increases The new parameters are always immediately effective and are also stored in a non volatile memory EEPROM After saving the parameters in the EEPROM any resaving is delayed by 30 minutes as the life span of the EEPROM is restricted by the number of write operations After recovery of the supply voltage it is possible to immediately save new parameters in EEPROM Whether the reconfiguration of the controller module takes place by the FB PID_FM shock free depends on the choice of the parameters Relationship between FB parameters and the parameterization interface The following figures show the relationship between the PID_FM FB and the parameter configuration interface of the controller module The parameters act at the same poi
93. A5E00059344 03 How Does the FM 355 Control 3 8 Parameter optimization with temperature controllers The IDSTATUS parameter contains the four hexadecimal values X A and F They have the following meaning X A FM 355 closed loop control module Without meaning always 0 Action number 0 Manual operation or no closed loop control operation 2 Closed loop control 4 Optimization activated FUZID_ON true 6 Transition state from manual operation to 2 or 4 Display Identification running and Parameters determined but not yet stored in EEPROM 0 Identification not running no new parameters determined 1 Identification running no new parameters determined 2 Identification not running new parameters determined but not yet stored in EEPROM 3 Identification running new parameters determined but not yet stored in EEPROM Error number 0 No error 4 Excessive step change of the actual value during the identification 5 Ratio of delay time to system time constant too large or strongly non linear behavior of the controlled system 6 Temperature drop or rise during identification start too large System not settled sufficiently Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 3 45 How Does the FM 355 Control 3 8 Parameter optimization with temperature controllers FM 355 closed loop control module 3 46 Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Installing and
94. CPU transfers these parameters to the module during every transition from STOP to RUN You can specify the parameters via the parameter configuration interface The parameter configuration interface is installed on your programming device PC and called up within STEP 7 Online Help Further information about the parameter configuration is available in the integrated online help Software for the 87 300 CPU Function Blocks The software for the CPU consists of the function blocks 1 8 PID_FM for modifying parameters and operating modes e g setpoint manual to automatic changeover during running operation and to read out process states e g actual value FORCE355 for forcing analog and digital inputs during commissioning forcing specify simulation values READ_355 for reading out the analog and digital input values during commissioning CH_DIAG for reading out channel specific diagnostic values during commissioning FUZ_355 for reading out the parameters of the self tuning temperature controller fuzzy controller for loading these parameters to the FM 355 e g at a module replacement without renewed parameter identification of the controller PID_PAR for special applications for changing further parameters during running operation FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Product Overview 7 5 FM 355 Software The following figure shows an S7 300 configuration with
95. Controller Functions and parameters of the controller output The following table lists the functions of the controller output and the setting possibilities Table 3 2 Functions of the controller output and setting possibilities Functions of the controller output Switching of external manipulated value Adjustable parameters The changeover between an external manipulated value and the effective manipulated value is carried out alternatively by e a binary value from the function block e a signal that results from the ORing of a binary value from the function block and a digital input Tracking input The following alternative settings are available e The tracking input has the value zero e The tracking input is the conditioned analog value of an analog input Position feedback input only step controller The following alternative settings are available e The position feedback input has the value zero e The position feedback input is the conditioned analog value of an analog input Switching to tracking The changeover between the manipulated value and the tracking input is carried out alternatively e A binary value from the function block e A signal that results from the ORing of a binary value from the function block and a digital input Switching to safety manipulated value e Determination of the safety manipulated value e Alternative reaction of the FM 355 during start up The FM 355 goes int
96. D Controller Dead Band 3 20 A major practical problem is the configuration of the PI PID action controller parameters i e finding the correct setting values for the controller parameters The quality of this configuration is of decisive importance to ensure that the PID control functions in accordance with the required task and requires either a high degree of practical experience special knowledge or a large amount of time The Optimize PID action controller function contained in the Configuration tool is used for initial setting of the controller parameters through adaptive commissioning This means that the process model is determined after a system identification and then the most favorable optimal setting values calculated for the controller parameters This procedure which is automatic to a great extent means that the user does not have to tediously trim the installed PID action controller online manually A dead band is positioned upstream of the PID action controller In a steady controller state the dead band suppresses the noise in the negative deviation signal which can arise through superimposition of a higher frequency interference signal over the controlled or reference variable thus preventing undesired oscillation of the controller output The dead band width can be adjusted If the negative deviation lies within the set dead band width the value 0 Negative deviation 0 is output at the dead band output Only wh
97. D action components are activated at the PID action controller A PID action controller adjusts the output variable via the action component until the Negative deviation ER 0 However this only applies if the output variable does not exceed the limits of the operating range If the manipulated variable limits are exceeded the l action component retains the value reached at the limit anti reset wind up The PID action controller maps the input variable ER t proportionally to the output signal and adds the components formed through differentiation and integration of ER t that are calculated with double precision in accordance with the trapezoid rule Pad approximant The time response is determined by the differentiation time constant differential action time TD and the integration time constant reset time TI For smoothing and suppressing disturbance signals a delay of the 1st arrangement time constant that can be set TM_LAG is integrated in the algorithm to form the D part Usually a small value for TM_LAG is sufficient in order to achieve the desired success ER Manipulated A variable __ x TD GAIN zm rac ERo Le GAIN ER g ER t GAIN ER g gt t TM_LAG le Tl Figure 3 19 Step response of the PID action controller FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 3 19 How Does the FM 355 Control 3 4 Controller Use and Configuration of the PI
98. DB and supply it with important data for each controller channel that you want to use 1 Use STEP 7 to create the instance DBs for the controller channels as data blocks with an assigned PID_FM function block 2 Enter the module address in the MOD_ADDR parameter at every instance DB The module address of the FM 355 is specified during the configuration of your hardware Take over the start address from HW Config 3 Enter the channel number of the corresponding controller channel 1 2 3 or 4 in the CHANNEL parameter at every instance DB 4 Save the instance DBs The PID_FM FB has to be called in the same OB as all the other FBs that access the same FM 355 The PID_FM FB is normally called in the watchdog interrupt OB 35 It requires an initialization run that is started by setting the COM_RST TRUE parameter in the start up of the CPU Calling of an FB in the start up OB is possible but not necessary After the initialization run the PID_FM FB sets the COM_RST parameter to FALSE FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Implementing the FM 355 in the User Program 7 2 The function block PID_FM 7 2 1 Operator Control via the PID_FM FB Transfer of the Operating Parameters The operating parameters for example setpoint manual manipulated value are transferred cyclically by the PID_FM FB to the FM 355 Operating parameters are all the I O parameters that lie between th
99. DR and CHANNEL is checked After the initialization run the parameter is set to FALSE FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 11 11 Assignment of the Instance DBs 11 1 Instance DB of the PID_FM FB Addr 44 1 Parameter LOAD_OP Data type BOOL Comment English Load operator parameter to FM 355 455 Permitted range of values Default setting FALSE Explanation If the through parameter Load operator parameter to FM 355 455 is set the operating parameters are loaded into the module and the through parameter is reset In para meter configu ration mask 44 2 READ_VAR BOOL Read variables from FM 355 455 FALSE If the through parameter Read variables from FM 355 455 is set the output parameters are read from the module and the through parameter is reset 44 3 LOAD_PAR BOOL Load control parameter to FM 355 455 FALSE If the through parameter Load control parameter to FM 355 455 is set the control parameters are loaded into the module and the through parameter is reset 46 0 Op_par WOR Begin of operating parameters W 16 3130 W 16 3 130 The op_par parameter may not be overwritten by the user It identifies the start of the operator parameters that are transferred to the module if LOAD_OP TRUE is set The end of the operating parame
100. EX_I parameter is outside the allowed range RET_VALU W 16 80FF is output If the CHANNEL parameter is outside its allowed range RET_VALU W 16 80B0 is output Note Note that the parameters you change by using FB 29 PID_PAR are overwritten by the parameters of the system data when the CPU starts up During operation you want to modify the start up time of the ramp for the reference variable and depending on the process state use different analog input values as the process value e Set the COM_RST parameter as TRUE in the instance DB in the CPU startup OB 100 e To configure the ramp up time of the ramp for the reference variable to 10 0 call the block with INDEX_R 30 VALUE_R 10 0 In the same call you can also configure analog input value 4 of the module as the process value Call the block INDEX_I 50 and VALUE_I 4 to do this e Call the block over several cycles until BUSY FALSE RET_VALU 0 and COM_RST FALSE FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 FB 29 and FB 30 Modifiable Parameters A 1 The FB 29 PID_PAR function block Table A 1 List of the REAL and INT parameters that can be changed with the PID_PAR FB Data type Description Index number No parameter selected 0 REAL Filter time constant for the analog input 1 REAL Measurement end 100 2 REAL Measurement star
101. FM 355 S Properties 9 1 Wiring and block diagrams 9 2 Direction of control action 3 17 Disturbance variable Signal selection Disturbance variable compensation E Error external Internal 12 1 Error display Establish Section parameters empirically Example Cascade control Determining the controller parameters Mixed control 13 1 Ratio control 13 12 Example APP_1 Application Block structure Functionality Parameterization Parameters of the system model 13 4 Step response of the control loop 13 5 Example APP_2 Application Block structure Functionality Parameterization Parameters of the system model 13 8 Step response of the control loop 13 9 FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Example application FM x55 S Example program Application External errors F Fields of application FM 355 Filters Firmware update FM Approval FM 355 Applications Basic structure 3 1 Control structures 1 2 Hardware Inserting in project Installation Installing on a mounting rail Module view Operating Modes Order Numbers Parameter configuration Removing Replacing a module Rules for operation S7 400 configuration Software Technical specifications Variants FM 355 C Analog outputs Application example 13 6 Block diagram Front connectors Interconnection qT FM 355 hardware FM 355 S Block diagram
102. Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 FB 29 and FB 30 Output parameters A 4 Instance DB of the FB 30 Table A 6 Output parameters of the instance DB for the FB 30 CJ_T_PAR Address Parameter Data type Comment Permitted Default Explanation In the English range of setting parameter values assignment screen form 6 0 RET_VALU WORD return value 0 RET_VALU contains SFC 58 59 the return value RET_VAL of the SFC58 for COM_RST FALSE and SFC 102 for COM_RST TRUE 8 0 BUSY BOOL BUSY value FALSE BUSY contains the of SFC return value BUSY of WR_REC the SFC 58 for COM_RST FALSE and SFC 102 for COM_RST TRUE If BUSY TRUE the parameters have not yet been entered in the module for distributed I Os The FB PID_PAR should then be called again in the next cycle taking RET_VALU into account with distributed I O The FB PID_PAR should then be called again in the next cycle FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 A 13 FB 29 and FB 30 A 4 Instance DB of the FB 30 Through parameters Table A 7 Through parameters of the instance DB for the FB 30 CJ_T_PAR Default setting Permitted range of values Comment English Address Parameter Data type BOOL read parameters from system data 10 0 COM_RST Explanation If the parameter COM_RST TRUE the FB PID_PAR performs an
103. Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 A 1 FB 29 and FB 30 A 7 The FB 29 PID_PAR function block Description Example A 2 To conserve system resources and time FB 29 PID_PAR should be called only when parameters are to be changed and not in every cycle FB 29 PID_PAR can be used to change one of the REAL parameters and one of the INT parameters listed in the following table each time it is called The assignment of the specified value to the parameter is carried out via the index numbers listed in the table which you can specify in the INDEX_R or INDEX_ parameter in the instance DB of FB PID_PAR If the input COM_RST TRUE the FB reads the parameters from the system data and saves them in static variables The parameters to be changed are overwritten there and the complete record is then transferred to the FM 355 Since the FB has its own data retention for the parameters in its static variables additional parameters can also be changed without initialization To this purpose you must call up the same instance DB several times consecutively with different index numbers Take into consideration the maximum number write and read requests by SFC 58 59 in the respective CPU The output parameter RET_VALU contains the RET_VAL of SFC102 during the initialization The RET_VAL of SFC 58 is displayed when writing to the FM 355 The values of RET_VAL are described in the reference manual 2 If the INDEX_R or IND
104. M 355 can be determined in accordance with the same rules as the start address of an analog module FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 4 1 Installing and Removing the FM 355 4 1 Preparing for Installation Fixed Addressing In fixed addressing the start address depends on the slot The tables in Manual 1 list the respective start address of an analog module at the various slots You can also calculate this fixed start address by using the following equation Adr 256 Rack No x 128 Slot No 4 x 16 Free Addressing In free addressing you specify the start address for the module under STEP 7 Important Safety Rules There are important rules you must observe for integrating an S7 300 with an FM 355 into a plant or a system These rules and regulations are explained in Manual 1 Reference Further information about addressing and configuring the instance DBs is available in this documentation in the sections Including the FM 355 in the User Program and Assignment of DBs See also Summary Page 7 1 FM 355 closed loop control module 4 2 Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Installing and Removing the FM 355 4 2 Installing and Removing the FM 355 4 2 Installing and Removing the FM 355 Precautions No special protection measures ESD guidelines are required for installing an FM 355 Tools Required You require a 4 5 mm screwd
105. Manual Safety mode Follow up control mode changeover to preset safety value Specification of the manipulated value DDC Direct Digital Control Follow up SPC controller SPC Set Point Control Back up mode at CPU in STOP or CPU failure FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Product Overview 1 2 Functionality of the FM 355 Number of Channels The FM 355 contains 4 controllers operating independently of each other in 4 channels Number of Inputs and Outputs The following table provides an overview of the number of inputs and outputs of the FM 355 Table 1 1 Inputs and outputs of the the FM 355 Inputs Outputs FM 355 C FM 355 S Analog inputs 4 4 Digital inputs 8 8 Analog outputs 4 Digital outputs 8 Diagnostics Interrupt The FM 355 can trigger a diagnostics interrupt if any of the following occur e Error in module parameterization e Module defective e Overflow and underflow at analog inputs e Load break and short circuit at analog outputs Hardware Interrupts Hardware interrupts are not required for FM 355 operation Reference Junction For operation with thermocouples the FM 355 has an additional analog input for connecting a Pt100 in 4 wire design This input is used to measure the reference junction temperature and thus to carry out compensation at thermocouples Parameterization The FM 355 can be parameterized by me
106. Polygon Interpolation value 7 input side 10 REAL Polygon Interpolation value 8 input side 11 REAL Polygon Interpolation value 9 input side 12 REAL Polygon Interpolation value 10 input side 13 REAL Polygon Interpolation value 11 input side 14 REAL Polygon Interpolation value 12 input side 15 REAL Polygon Interpolation value 13 input side 16 REAL Polygon Interpolation value 1 output side 17 REAL Polygon Interpolation value 2 output side 18 REAL Polygon Interpolation value 3 output side 19 REAL Polygon Interpolation value 4 output side 20 REAL Polygon Interpolation value 5 output side 21 REAL Polygon Interpolation value 6 output side 22 REAL Polygon Interpolation value 7 output side 23 REAL Polygon Interpolation value 8 output side 24 REAL Polygon Interpolation value 9 output side 25 REAL Polygon Interpolation value 10 output side 26 REAL Polygon Interpolation value 11 output side 27 REAL Polygon Interpolation value 12 output side 28 FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 7 25 Implementing the FM 355 in the User Program 7 7 The PID_PAR function block Data type Description Index number REAL Polygon Interpolation value 13 output side 29 REAL Ramp up time for reference variable 30 REAL Safety reference variable or safety reference variable response 31 REAL Offset for setp
107. RORORS FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 1 5 Product Overview 7 4 FM 355 Hardware Front Connectors The FM 355 offers the following connection possibilities via the front connectors e 8 digital inputs e 4 analog inputs e 1 reference junction input e 8 digital outputs only step controllers e 4 analog outputs only continuous action controllers e Supply voltage 24 V DC between L and M to supply the module and the digital and analog outputs e Reference point of the analog circuit Mana The front connectors must be ordered separately refer to the Spare Parts appendix Front Connector Coding When you press a front connector from the wiring position to the operating position the front connector coding engages Thereafter this front connector can only be attached to an FM 355 module Labeling strips Enclosed with the module are two labeling strip on which you can write your signal names individually The corresponding pin assignments are printed on the insides of the front panel Order Number and Version The order number and the version of the FM 355 are given at the bottom of the left hand front panel Bus Connectors The communication within a row of the S7 300 takes place via the bus connector The bus connector is enclosed with the FM 355 FM 355 closed loop control module 1 6 Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Product Overv
108. Removing the FM 355 4 4 1 Preparing for Installation Determining the Slots The FM 355 function module occupies two slots It can be installed like a signal module in any of slots 4 to 11 Mechanical Configuration Manual 1 describes the possibilities open to you for mechanical installation and how to proceed when configuring The following gives only a few supplementary notes 1 A maximum of eight SMs or FMs are permissible per rack 2 The maximum number is restricted by the width of the modules or the length of your mounting rail The FM 355 requires an installation width of 80 mm 3 The maximum number is restricted by the total current consumptions of all modules to the right of the CPU from the 5 V backplane bus supply The typical current input of the FM 355 from the 5 V backplane bus supply amounts to 50 mA 4 The maximum number is also restricted by the memory required by the CPU software for communications with the FM 355 Vertical or Horizontal Arrangement The horizontal rack installation should be used if possible For vertical installation you must observe the restricted ambient temperatures max 40 C Determining the Start Address The start address of the FM 355 is required for communication between the CPU and the FM 355 The start address has to be entered into the instance DBs of the required FBs The entry is made either by using the STL LAD editor or from the user program The start address of the F
109. S7 300 and S7 400 System and Standard Functions Belongs to Package 6ES7 810 4CA04 8ARO Basics The basics of control technology can be found for example in the following books Title Author Order No Vom Proze zur Regelung Giler Schmid A19100 L531 F196 From a process to a control ISBN 3 8009 1551 0 system Regeln mit SIMATIC S5 Siemens E80850 C331 X A2 Grundlagen Basic principles of controlling with SIMATIC S5 FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 D 1 References D 1 References FM 355 closed loop control module D 2 Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Glossary Cascade control Configuration Control device Control device Control loop Control variable The cascade control is a consecutive switching of controllers whereupon the first controller master controller specifies the setpoint for the series connected controllers secondary controllers or influences the setpoints in accordance with the current negative deviation of the main control variable By involving additional process variables the controller result can be improved by using a cascade control To do this at a suitable point an auxiliary control variable PV2 is recorded and this controls the reference setpoint output of the master controller SP2 The master controller controls the process value PV1 on the fixed setpoint SP1 and adj
110. S7 313 1AD01 OABO 314 6ES7 314 1AE02 0AB0 314 IFM 6ES7 314 5AE01 OABO Change the CPU to the STOP state and then back to the RUN state 315 6ES7 315 1AF01 0OABO 315 2 DP 6ES7 315 2AF01 0OABO 614 6ES7 614 1AH01 OABO The technological function of the FM 355 is not influenced by this communication fault In accordance with the parameter configuration the controllers of the FM 355 start up with one of the following operating states e Controller operation Controlling with the safety setpoint value Controlling with the last valid setpoint value e Manipulated value Safety manipulated value FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 3 39 How Does the FM 355 Control 3 7 Characteristics of the FM 355 Backup mode If the CPU goes into STOP or fails or if the connection of the FM 355 to the CPU fails the FM 355 goes into backup operation and continues to control with the parameters valid at the moment of failure The FM 355 uses either the last setpoint value or the safety setpoint value Depending on the parameter configuration Backup operation is indicated by the yellow Backup LED In backup operation the FM 355 can be operated directly via the OP As soon as the CPU has returned to RUN the FM 355 can no longer be operated via the OP See also unctional mechanisms and data storage in the FM 355 Page 3 30 Firmware update In order to extend the functionality a
111. SIEMENS Introduction Product Overview Information for the controller SIMATIC adjustment How Does the FM 355 3 Control FM 355 closed loop control module pce and Removing the 4 5 Xo oe D J w a a Ql Operating Instructions Parameter Configuration of gt un w on a O Implementing the FM 355 in gt D C n D a T Q Q o 3 CO N Commissioning the FM 355 Properties of Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs Connecting Measuring Transducers and 1 0 Loads Actuators Assignment of the Instance 1 1 Faults and Diagnostics Examples This manual is part of the documentation package with order no 6 S7355 0VHO0 8BAO FB 29 and FB 30 Data Sheet Edition 02 2006 Spare Parts A5E00059344 03 References Safety Guidelines This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety as well as to prevent damage to property The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger Danger indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken Warning indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken Caution gt ee w
112. Tg WwW E X sd g K T t A y 100 0 gt Figure 2 3 Control function of a two step controller without feedback Transition function without controller Tu Delay time Tg Recovery time Xsd Switching difference Two Step Controllers With Feedback The behavior of two step controllers at controlled systems with high delay times e g furnaces at which the utilization room is separated from the heating can be improved through electronic feedbacks The feedback is used to increase the switching frequency of the controller thus reducing the amplitude of the controlled variable In addition the control action results can be improved substantially in dynamic operation The limit for the switching frequency is set by the output level It should not exceed 1 to 5 switches per minute at mechanical actuators such as relays and contactors In the case of voltage and current outputs with downstream thyristor or Triac controllers high switching frequencies can be selected that exceed the limit frequency of the controlled system by far FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 2 5 Information for the controller adjustment 2 2 Controller Types Two Step Three Step Controllers Since the switching pulses can no longer be determined at the output of the controlled system results comparable with those of continuous controllers are obtained In contrast to a continuous controller
113. The D part of the manipulated variable is shown on the LMN_D parameter FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 11 29 Assignment of the Instance DBs 77 5 Instance DB of the CH_DIAG FB Output Parameters Table 11 11 Output parameters of the instance DB for the CH_DIAG FB Ad Parameter Data Comment Permitted range of Default Explanation In the dress type English values setting parameter assign ment screen form 34 0 RET_VALU WORD Return value 0 RET_VALU includes SFC 58 59 the return value SFB 52 53 RET_VAL of the SFC 58 59 With the block for PROFINET Mode the RET_VAL includes the 2nd and 3rd bytes from the STATUS parameter of the SFB 52 53 RET_VALU can be evaluated if an error is reported via the QMOD_F see reference manual 2 FM 355 closed loop control module 11 30 Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Assignment of the Instance DBs 11 6 77 6 Instance DB of the PID_PAR FB Instance DB of the PID_PAR FB Introduction The FB PID_PAR is used to change parameters on line which are not contained in FB PID_FM The following tables list the parameters of this instance DB e Input parameters e Output parameters Input Parameters Table 11 12 Input parameters of the instance DB for the PID_PAR FB Addr 0 0 Parameter Data Comment Permitted range of Default Explanation
114. The following figure shows the function scheme and the parameters of the controlled system Input parameters Output parameters Parameter Type PROCES ER 100 Signal Type COM_RST BOOL FALSE CYCLE TIME T 1s GAIN REAL 0 0 DISV REAL 0 0 INV_UP BOOL FALSE QLMNR_HS BOOL FALSE INV_DOWN BOOL FALSE i Q OUTV REAL _ 0 0 QLMNR_LS BOOL FALSE LMNR REAL 0 0 LMNR_HLM REAL 100 0 LMNR_LLM REAL 0 0 MTR_TM TIME T 30s TM_LAG1 TIME T 10s TM_LAG2 TIME T 10s TM_LAG3 TIME T 10s Figure 13 3 Function scheme and parameters of the system model PROC_S S Default setting when the instance DB is created Parameters and Step Response The reaction of a control loop with simulated PT 3rd order controlled system is shown by means of a concrete parameter configuration of the step controller with Pl action and activated dead band The set system parameters with 10 s delay time each approximately simulate the behavior of a rapid temperature process or a filling level control system Setting one of the delay times to TM_LAGx 0 s reduces the order of the system by one degree FM 355 closed loop control module 13 4 Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Examples 13 1 Application example for the FM 355 S The curve diagram configuration tool shows the dynamic and transient response o
115. The following table contains further rules for the conversion time of the reference junction input Table 3 5 Rules for the conversion time If Then A resolution of 12 bits is selected at all the analog the reference junction requires the same inputs conversion time as an analog input The higher resolution of 14 bits has been selected for even one analog input the reference junction requires a conversion time One of the controllers was configured as a of 100 ms temperature controller The sampling time is displayed in the parameter configuration interface Module parameters command button The following sampling time results for each controller in the example shown in the previous figure at 50 Hz line frequency tsample 100 ms 20 ms 20 ms 100 ms 20 ms 260 ms FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 How Does the FM 355 Control 3 7 Characteristics of the FM 355 The following figure shows an example of the sequence of execution at only three used analog inputs Conversion times example f Reference 20 ms Boot junction for analog inputs 1 to4 __Controtter Analog input 20 ms channels 1 k 1 Controller Analog input 20 ms gt L e Channels 2 2 i Controller Analog input Not used channels 3 0 ms 3 Controller channels 4 Analog in
116. The simulation values for the channels one to four are specified via the parameters PV_SIM i You can have the simulation values become effective at two points e S AION i TRUE 1 lt i lt 4 The value PV_SIM i is used instead of the value of analog input i of the module e S_PVON i TRUE 1 lt i lt 4 The value PV_SIM i is used instead of the conditioned value of analog input i of the module FM 355 closed loop control module 7 16 Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Implementing the FM 355 in the User Program 7 4 The FORCE355 function block Simulating Digital Values Simulation of the values for the digital inputs one to eight is activated via the switches S_DION i whereby 1 lt i lt 8 The simulation values are specified via the parameters DI_SIM i e S_DION i TRUE 1 lt i lt 8 The value DI_SIM i is used instead of the value of digital input i of the module Note LEDs 11 to 18 also always display the state of the corresponding digital input during simulation Simulation value 1 lt i lt 4 PV_SIM i Simulation Simulation switch on switch on S_AION i S_PVON i 7 rn Lo O Dn IOJ Sensor type A ie ae di La gt La V pa D gt Ve To EE it gt Prepro Filter Square root Polyline Standardize cessed analog value Reference ___l
117. _DIAG_355 is set in the OB 82 The FM_DIAG_ 355 is called in the OB 35 It reads the diagnostics record DS1 of the module riggering diagnostic interrupts Page 12 2 FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Examples 13 4 Interconnection example for a cascade control 13 4 Interconnection example for a cascade control Double loop cascade control The following figure shows a double loop cascade control T 1 T Section Section part1 part 2 J L Controller 1 2 step L Figure 13 9 Double loop cascade control You realize this controller interconnection with a controller module S whereby you configure a pulse controller as the main controller and select the manipulated value of the main controller on the set value input You can also realize a controller cascade by means of a controller module C The main controller is then not a pulse controller and the slave controller is not a step controller The interconnection must be realized identically In the slave controller the manipulated value of the main controller is standardized from the value range 0 to 100 to the value range of the actual value A and is then further processed as the set value Manipulated Preparing the set point variable LMN of the master m Spontroller NS Acts A gt oA Setpoint
118. _HLM 0 0 The setpoint is Limiting 1 physical variable always limited by an setpoint upper and lower limit controller The Setpoint low limit input specifies the lower limit 8 0 H_ALM REAL High limit alarm gt H_WRN 100 0 Four limits can be Alarm 1 physical variable assigned for controller monitoring the process variable or the negative deviation The Upper limit alarm input specifies the highest limit FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 11 35 Assignment of the Instance DBs 11 8 Assignment of the DBs for Operator Control and Monitoring via OP Addr Parameter Data Comment Permitted range of Default Explanation In the type English values setting parameter assign ment screen form 12 0 H_WRN REAL High limit warning H_ALM L_WRN 90 0 Four limits can be Alarm 1 physical variable assigned for controller monitoring the process variable or the negative deviation The Upper limit warning input specifies the second high limit 16 0 L_WRN REAL Low limit warning H_WRN L_ALM 10 0 Four limits can be Alarm 1 physical variable assigned for controller monitoring the process variable or the negative deviation The Lower limit warning input specifies the second lower limit 20 0 L_ALM REAL Low limit alarm lt L_WRN 0 0 Four limits can be Alarm 1 physical variab
119. _LALM is signaled at the Upper limit alarm triggered output In the parameter assign ment screen form 38 1 QH_WRN BOOL High limit warning reached FALSE The actual value or the controlled variable is monitored for four limits Exceeding of the limit H_WRN is signaled at the Upper limit warning triggered output 38 2 QL_WRN BOOL Lower limit warning reached FALSE The actual value or the controlled variable is monitored for four limits Exceeding of the limit L_WRN is signaled at the Lower limit warning triggered output 38 3 QL_ALM BOOL Low limit alarm reached FALSE The actual value or the controlled variable is monitored for four limits Exceeding of the limit L_ALM is signaled at the Lower limit alarm triggered output 38 4 QLMN_HLM BOOL High limit of manipulated value reached FALSE The manipulated variable is always limited to an high and a low limit The high limit of manipulated value reached output displays the exceeding of the upper limit this does not apply to step action controllers without analog position feedback FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Assignment of the Instance DBs 11 1 Instance DB of the PID_FM FB Addr Parameter Data Comment type English 38 5 QLMN_LLM BOOL Low limit of manipulated value reached P
120. _TEMP REAL Cold junction 0 0 On the CJ_TEMP temperature output the measured reference junction temperature is displayed by the module if a thermocouple element input is configured and the reference junction temperature is not configured FM 355 closed loop control module 11 26 Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Assignment of the Instance DBs 11 4 Instance DB of the READ_355 FB Addr 6 0 Parameter STAT_DI Data type ARRAY 1 8 of BOOL Comment English Status of binary input DI1 to DI8 Permitted range of values Default setting FALSE Explanation The states of digital inputs 1 to 8 are displayed at the STAT_DI parameters In the parameter assign ment screen form channel number x8 DIAG x P V_PER ARRAY 1 4 of STRUCT Analog input 0 to 20mA 1500 to 10000 mV 0 0 The parameter DIAG 1 PV_PER displays for example the analog input value of the module in the unit mA or mV channel number x8 4 DIAG x P V_PHY ARRAY 1 4 of STRUCT Linearized analog input physical 0 0 The conditioned analog input value of the module is for example displayed at the parameter DIAG 1 PV_PHY 40 0 RET_VAL U WORD Return value SFC 58 59 SFB 52 53 RET_VALU includes the return value RET_VAL of the SFC 58 59 With the block for PROFINET Mode th
121. a ms etek ss Ta in the parameter configuration interface Button Module parameters 230 C b GAIN a TAIms SH S x Tyls 2000 F s Tal ms A s c Tis Tyl S Fm x 6 66 B 1000 Ea Ta ms d To s Tuls a ane 1000 eal In addition at three step controllers e LMNLLM Sk C S C SH S LMN_LLM is a parameter of the PID_FM FB It specifies the lower limit of the controller x 100 You can set this value at the Lower parameter in the Limit manipulated value controller mask of the parameter configuration interface You have to set the same value at the Start of range input signal parameter of manipulated value B in the Split range controller mask The two settings have to agree so that the input value of the split range function of the controller can take on values from the full setting range of the slit range function FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 2 19 Information for the controller adjustment 2 6 Determining the System Parameters for Two Three Step Controllers Example 2 20 Manipulated 0 up to variable Manipulated 100 up to variable 100 Corresponds to heating 0 Corresponds to cooling Set the parameters of the split range function as follows for this example Manipulated value A Start of range input signal 0 End of range input signal 100 Start of range output
122. and on the output may carry incorrect interim values for the duration of approx 10 ms FM 355 closed loop control module 9 6 Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Properties of Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs 9 3 Properties of the Analog Outputs Continuous Action Controllers Connection diagram The following figure shows the connection diagram of the analog outputs of the FM 355 C a O Backup o N O O A O N ae Gl TB 3o 4 g Soot e E Eoo 8 4d aan 10 Figure 9 4 FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Current output L 11 12 13 14 15 16 I7 18 24 V Qi Mana CH 1 Ql2 MANA CH2 QI3 MANA CH3 Ql4 Mana CH4 M m aA Ee Terminal diagram Voltage output L 11 12 13 14 15 16 I7 18 24 V Qv1 MANA CH1 QV2 MANA CH2 QV3 MANA CH3 QV4 Mana CH4 Connection diagram of the analog outputs continuous action controllers Properties of Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs 9 3 Properties of the Analog Outputs Continuous Action Controllers Block Diagram The following figure shows the block diagram of the analog outputs o
123. ans of a parameter configuration interface FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 1 3 Product Overview 1 3 Areas of Application for the FM 355 1 3 Areas of Application for the FM 355 Where Can You Use the FM 355 The FM 355 is a universally applicable controller module for the following control tasks Applications Temperature control Level control Filling level control Pressure control Flow control Concentration control The FM 355 is usually used to carry out control tasks in the following branches 1 4 General machine construction Plant construction Industrial furnace construction Cooling and heating unit construction Food and beverage industry Process engineering Environmental technology Glass and ceramics manufacturing Rubber and plastics machines Woodworking and paper industry FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Product Overview 7 4 FM 355 Hardware 1 4 FM 355 Hardware Module View The following figure shows the FM 355 module with front connectors and the bus connector at closed front doors Coo ooo ara Comore rrr TT 7 f Wo Figure 1 1 FM 355 module view Front connector with front connector coding Type plate SIMATIC interface bus connector Version Order Number Labeling strips LEDs ORORORO
124. ans of a recording unit see figure below To do this proceed as follows 1 Specify the programming device manipulated value 0 via the loop monitor 2 Configure the controller as a PI controller 3 Enter uncritical control parameters via the parameter configuration interface or the PID_FM FB GAIN 1 0 TI TD 0 0 4 Load the parameters to the module 5 Switch to the manipulated value controller via the loop monitor 6 Enter the setpoint temperature 1 The module switches on the heating 7 Wait until the process value has settled 2 Remark The setpoint value does not have to be reached 8 Specify the setpoint temperature 0 C 3 The module switches on the cooling Remark Steps 7 and 8 are only required at three step controllers Temperature Start temperature o Heating up curve Cooling down curve Time Figure 2 10 Determined heating and cooling curve You can then determine the following parameters from the curve Tu Delay time in s Sx Maximum ascent of the cooling curve in C s Sx Maximum ascent of the heating curve in C s FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Information for the controller adjustment 2 6 Determining the System Parameters for Two Three Step Controllers Determining the Controller Parameters The sampling time Ta is determined by the conversion time of the FM 355 You can read off the a T
125. arameter assignment error Permitted range of values Default setting FALSE Explanation The module checks the validity of the parameters A parameter configuration error is displayed at the Parameter configuration error output You can also read out these parameter assignment errors by using the PLC gt Parameter Assignment Error menu of the parameter configuration interface In the para meter assign ment screen form 123 1 QCH_F BOOL Channel error FALSE The output Channel error is set if the controller channel cannot supply any valid results Channel error e g wire break is also set if QPARA_F 1 or QMOD _F 1 If QCH_F TRUE then the precise error information in the diagnostic record DS1 of the module is read off 123 2 QUPRLM BOOL Limit of positive setpoint inclination reached FALSE The setpoint is limited to a positive and negative gradient If the output Limit of positive setpoint inclination triggered is set the positive setpoint inclination is limited 123 3 QDNRLM BOOL Limit of negative setpoint inclination reached FALSE The setpoint is limited to a positive and negative gradient If the negative set value inclination reached output is set then the set value inclination is restricted 11 46 FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03
126. arameter parameter FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 FB 29 and FB 30 A 2 Instance DB of the FB 29 Output parameters Table A 3 Input parameters of the instance DB for the FB 29 PID_PAR Address Parameter Data type Comment Permitted Default Explanation In the English range of setting parameter values assignme nt screen form 14 0 RET_VALU WORD Return value of 0 RET_VALU contains SFC 58 and SFC the return value 102 RET_VAL of the Return value of SFC58 for SFC 58 and SFC COM_RST FALSE 102 and SFC 102 for COM_RST TRUE RET_VALU W 16 8 OFF if INDEX_R or INDEXI are not within permitted value range RET_VALU W 16 8 OBO if CHANNEL is not within permitted value range 16 0 BUSY BOOL BUSY value of FALSE BUSY contains the SFC 58 and SFC return value BUSY of 102 the SFC 58 for BUSY display of the COM_RST FALSE SFC 58 and SFC and SFC 102 for 102 COM_RST TRUE If BUSY TRUE the parameters have not yet been entered in the module for distributed I Os FB PID_PAR should then be called again in the next cycle taking RET_VALU into account FM 355 closed loop control module A 8 Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 FB 29 and FB 30 A 2 Instance DB of the FB 29 Through parameters Table A 4 Through parameters of the instance DB for the FB 29 PID_PAR Address
127. arameters as at least one simulated manipulated variable is required for optimization if a step controller without position feedback is being configured The simulated value is displayed at the parameter LMN_A When the simulation is activated the value of the parameter LMNRSVAL is set as the start value CAUTION Over time the simulation deviates increasingly from the true position feedback Only in the case of step controllers without analog position feedback In para meter configu ration mask 57 4 58 0 FUZID_ON SP_OP BOOL REAL Fuzzy identification on Setpoint operation Technical range of values physical variable FALSE 0 0 The identification of the fuzzy algorithm is activated at the input Switch fuzzy identification on The configuration tool controller optimization has access to the through parameter Setpoint operation If the bit SP_OP_ON is set the value Setpoint operation is used as the setpoint value FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 11 15 Assignment of the Instance DBs 11 1 Instance DB of the PID_FM FB Addr 62 0 Parameter LMN_OP Data type REAL Comment English Manipulated value operation Permitted range of values 100 0 100 0 Default setting 0 0 Explanation The configuration tool has access to the thr
128. arameters button You can select the following operating modes e Switchover to specification of the manipulated value PID_FM FB e Switchover to follow up control mode specification of the manipulated value via an analog input e Switchover to safety manipulated value In the case of a step controller you can furthermore specify the following signals via digital inputs e Checkback Actuating device at upper limit stop e Checkback Actuating device at lower limit stop FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 3 7 How Does the FM 355 Control 3 4 Controller 3 4 Controller Controller structure Controller Type The controller of any channel of the module consists of the following blocks e Negative deviation generation Condition of setpoint value and actual value Signal selection for setpoint value actual value D action input and disturbance variable e Control algorithm Temperature controller PID action controller with dead band e Controller output Manipulated value switchover Manipulated value conditioning The parameter configuration is carried out in the masks Negative deviation calculation Control algorithm and Controller output The figure below provides an overview of the controller structure Controllers Error signal Controller algorithm Controller output Figure 3 4 Controller str
129. arget groups e Fitters e Programmers e Commissioning engineers e Service and maintenance personnel Scope of This Manual The present manual contains the description of function module FM 355 applicable at the time the manual was published We reserve the right to describe changes of FM 355 functionality in a Product Information leaflet FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 iii Introduction Approvals A CE Marking The S7 300 has the following approvals UL Recognition Mark Underwriters Laboratories UL in accordance with Standard UL 508 CSA Certification Mark Canadian Standard Association CSA to Standard C 22 2 No 142 FM approval complying with Factory Mutual Approval Standard Class Number 3611 Class Division 2 Group A B C D Warning Personal injury and material damage may be incurred In potentially explosive environments there is a risk of injury or damage if you disconnect any connectors while the S7 300 is in operation Always isolate the S7 300 operated in such areas before you disconnect and connectors Warning WARNING DO NOT DISCONNECT WHILE CIRCUIT IS LIVE UNLESS LOCATION IS KNOWN TO BE NONHAZARDOUS Our products fulfill the requirements of the EU Directive 89 336 EEC Electromagnetic compatibility CE The EU conformity certificates are available for the relevant authorities and are kept at the following address in
130. ata blocks with an assigned FB 30 CJ_T_PAR function block 2 Enter the module address in the MOD_ADDR parameter for the instance DB The module address of the FM 355 is determined by the configuration of your hardware Take the start address from HW Config 3 Save the instance DB The reference junction temperature can be specified via the CJ_T parameter The RET_VALU output value contains the return value RET_VAL of the SFC58 for COM_RST FALSE and SFC 102 for COM_RST TRUE Start and Initialization The FB 30 CJ_T_PAR must be called in the same OB as all the other FBs that access the same FM 355 The FB 30 CJ_T_PAR requires an initialization run it is automatically triggered if the system data SDB default data of the FM 355 has not yet been read from the FB 30 CJ_T_PAR You can also start the initialization yourself with COM_RST TRUE which is usually done in OB100 since the system data is sent to the FM 355 after STOP RUN of the CPU The initialization process lasts several cycles No data is sent to the FM 355 via SFC 58 during the initialization COM_RST TRUE The block automatically resets the COM_RST parameter after the initialization FM 355 closed loop control module A 10 Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 FB 29 and FB 30 A 3 The FB 30 CJ_T_PAR function block The FB 30 CJ_T_PAR is usually called cyclically When the FM 355 is used in distributed I O it may take several start cycles for
131. ation and from an part which is proportionate to the value of the negative deviation and the time Features no remaining negative deviation quicker controlling than that with the controller suitable for all sections PID controller PID algorithm Algorithm for calculating an output signal that is formed by the multiplication integration and differentiation of the negative deviation The PID algorithm is designed as a purely parallel structure Feature greater quality of control can be achieved provided the dead time of the control section is not greater than the total of the remaining time constants Process identification The process identification is a function of the configuration tool It provides information regarding the transmission behavior and the structure of the process A device independent process model is conveyed as a result this describes the process in its static and dynamic behavior Optimum values for the controller parameters are calculated from this controller design FM 355 closed loop control module Glossary 4 Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Glossary Process value Ratio control The current value of the control variable is PV e single loop ratio control A single loop ratio control is employed if the ratio of two control variables is more important for a process than the absolute values of the control variables e g speed regulation e multiple loop ratio control
132. ational error limits across the temperature range referenced to the input range e 80mV 1 e 250 mV to 1000 mV 0 6 e From 2 5 V to 10V 0 8 e 3 2 mA to 20 mA 07 Basic error limit operational limit at 25 C referenced to input range e 80mV 0 6 e 250 mV to 1000 mV 0 4 e From 2 5 V to 10V 0 6 0 5 e 3 2 mA to 20 mA Temperature error referenced to the input range 0 005 K Linearity error referenced to the input range 0 05 Repeat accuracy in transient state at 25 C referenced to input range 0 05 FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Data Sheet B 2 Technical Specitications FM 355 Interference Suppression Error Limits Outputs Crosstalk between the outputs 40 dB Operational error limit in the entire temperature range referenced to the output range e Voltage 0 5 e Current 0 6 Basic error limit operational limit at 25 C referenced to output range e Voltage 0 4 e Current 0 5 Temperature error referenced to output range 0 02 K Linearity error referenced to output range 0 05 Repeat accuracy in transient state at 25 C referenced 0 05 to output range Output ripple range 0 kHz to 50 kHz referenced to 0 05 output range Data for Selecting a Sensor Digital Inputs Input voltage e Rated value DC 24 V e Fo
133. be assigned freely to the controller channels Figure 3 2 Block diagram of the FM 355 S step controller Interconnection Possibilities of the FM 355 S The function blocks of the FM 355 S do not have a fixed assignment to each other so that they can be interconnected by configuring parameters Each analog input has its own analog value conditioning filtering linearization scaling Up to 4 analog inputs and up to 5 digital inputs can be assigned to each controller channel Each controller channel can be interconnected with the conditioned analog values the digital inputs or also the output of another controller channel Two digital outputs each have a fixed assignment to the 4 controller channels FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 3 3 How Does the FM 355 Control 3 2 Basic Parameters 3 2 Basic Parameters Introduction The FM 355 has basic parameters that influence the interrupts and the reaction on CPU STOP Basic Parameters The basic parameters can be set under HW Config in the Basic parameters mask The following settings are possible e Interrupt generation Yes No e Interrupt selection None Diagnostics interrupt e Reaction to CPU Stop Continue 3 3 FM 355 inputs Controller module inputs Different types of sensor can be connected to the analog inputs The input signals of the sensors are then conditioned in acco
134. cal conditions or interference potential differences Ucm static or dynamic can occur between the measuring lines M of the input channels and the reference point of the measuring circuit Mana Note In order to ensure that the permissible value Ucm is not exceeded you must connect M to Mana You must also establish a connection from M to Mana when resistance type sensors are connected This also applies to inputs which are programmed accordingly but remain unused FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Connecting Measuring Transducers and Loads Actuators 10 1 Connecting Measuring Transducers to Analog Inputs The following figure shows the connection in principle of insulated measuring transducers to an FM 355 L _ FM 355 m p M Insulated M transduc M ADC Logic ers M MANA CPU o Ih E HH P 2 Im Ground bus Figure 10 1 Block diagram for the connection of electrically isolated measuring transducers Non lsolated Measuring Transducers The non isolated measuring transducers are connected to the local ground potential You must connect Mana to the ground potential Local conditions or disturbance may cause potential differences CMV static or dynamic between locally distributed measuring points If the permissible value for Ucm is exceeded interconne
135. can test the module without a real process Prerequisites Requirements for working with the example program e CPU 314 is inserted at Slot 2 e FM 355 S is plugged into slot 4 e CPU and FM 355 S are supplied with voltage e There is an online connection PG PC to the CPU If you wish to work with a different CPU or FM 355 you must adapt the example under Configure hardware Load the sample program To install the program proceed as follows 1 Download the user program blocks from example 355 S to the CPU 2 In HW Config configure hardware launch the parameterization screen of the FM 355 3 Use the Test gt gt Open instance DB menu item to open the DB 31 You can now work with the loop display the curve recorder and the controller optimization FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 13 1 Examples 13 1 Application example for the FM 355 S Application of the Example Program The example Example 355 S includes a step controller in conjunction with a simulated control section that comprises a 3rd arrangement delay element PT3 The example program can be used to create a step controller without any difficulty and to configure and test it in all its properties in an offline interaction with a typical system arrangement The example program makes it easy to understand the functionality and configuration of controllers with discontinuous output such as they are very oft
136. control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 M Logic _ Processing in the FM 355 external resistance 50 Q 10 11 Connecting Measuring Transducers and Loads Actuators 10 3 Connecting Voltage Sensors Current Sensors and Resistance Thermometers Connection of Resistance Thermometers For Example Pt 100 and Resistors The resistance thermometers resistors are measured in a four wire connection Constant current is fed to the resistance thermometers resistors by means of the connections Ic and Ic The voltage arising at the resistance thermometer resistor is measured at the connection M and M This ensures highly accurate measurement results with the four conductor connection The following figure shows the connection of resistance thermometers to an FM 355 ns Te FM 355 Pe M hg M F Processing in ADC Era a IC 09 the FM 355 a oh Ic c MANA Figure 10 9 Connecting resistance thermometers With the two three conductor connection you must apply corresponding jumpers to the module between M and Ic or M and Ic However you have to expect a loss of accuracy in the measurement results FM 355 closed loop control module 10 12 Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Connecting Measuring Transducers and Loads Actuators 10 4 Connecting Loads Actuators to Analog Outputs
137. ct the measuring points by means of equipotential conductors The CPU must be operated ground coupled This means that you must provide a jumper between 4 and M at the CPU FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 10 3 Connecting Measuring Transducers and Loads Actuators 10 1 Connecting Measuring Transducers to Analog Inputs The following figure shows the connection in principle of non isolated measuring transducers to an FM 355 L Z FM 355 M M non 56 Me insulated lt M ADC Logic transduc lt M ers EEEE A v MANA CPU Capacity compen sating cable OJOS o z z ah Ground bus Figure 10 2 Block diagram of the connection of non insulated measuring transducers FM 355 closed loop control module 10 4 Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Connecting Measuring Transducers and Loads Actuators 10 2 Use of Thermocouples 10 2 Use of Thermocouples Introduction This section describes the design of thermocouples and the points to be observed when connecting thermocouples Thermocouple Structure A thermocouple comprises e The thermocouple detecting elements and e The mounting and connection parts required in each case The thermocouple consists of two wires made of different metals or of
138. ctional limitations listed below If the READ_VAR TRUE parameter is set then the process values are read from the FM 355 via the SFC RD_REC SFB RDREC However this requires a higher run time refer to the technical specifications After a successful data transfer the READ_VAR parameter of the PID_FM FB is reset to FALSE This can take a few call cycles if the FM 355 is used in distributed I Os Function at READ_VAR TRUE If one of the following parameters Operating setpoint SP_OP Operating manipulated value LMN_OP and the corresponding switches SP_OP_ON and LMNOP_ON has been changed through OP control the PID_FM FB takes over these values from the FM 355 after the CPU start up FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 7 3 Implementing the FM 355 in the User Program 7 2 The function block PID_FM Functional Limitiations at READ_VAR FALSE Error Displays See also 7 4 e The SP setpoint from the FM ER negative deviation DISV disturbance variable LMN_A and LMN_B parameters are not read from the FM e The data are multiplexed The actual value manipulated value and binary displays are updated during every fourth call of the block e If the setpoint and manual manipulated value were operated via the MPI these operating values are not read from the FM during the start up of the FB CPU Note Multiplexing of the data to be transferred during access to t
139. d at the PD action controller This means that the output signal also equals 0 when the Negative deviation ER 0 If an operating point is to be 0 i e if a numerical value is to be set for the manipulated variable at negative deviation zero this can be done via the operating point e Operating point automatic The operating point is set to the current manual manipulated variable at the manual automatic changeover of the controller e Operating point not automatic You can configure the operating point parameter The PD action controller maps the input variable ER t proportionally to the output signal and adds the D action component formed through differentiation of ER t that is calculated with double precision in accordance with the trapezoid rule Pad approximant The time response is determined by the differentiation time constant differential action time TD FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 How Does the FM 355 Control 3 4 Controller For smoothing and suppressing disturbance signals a delay of the 1st arrangement time constant that can be set TM_LAG is integrated in the algorithm to form the D part Usually a small value for TM_LAG is sufficient in order to achieve the desired success ER Manipulated4 variable Manipulated variable 4 TM_LAG Figure 3 18 Step response of the PD action controller PID action Control The P action l action and
140. d to it at a set ratio controller Process value A Setpoint value offset Process value D 11 28 FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Assignment of the Instance DBs 77 5 Instance DB of the CH_DIAG FB Addr 12 0 Parameter DIF_I Data type REAL Comment English Derivative unit input Permitted range of values Default setting 0 0 Explanation The input variable of the D action component at the DIF_I parameter This is particularly of interest if for example an analog input is configured as the input variable of the D action component In the parameter assign ment screen form 16 0 TRACKPER REAL Input value for LMN tracking 0 0 The TRACKPER parameter shows the input size at which the set value is being followed up if the controller is switched to set value follow up 20 0 IDSTATUS WORD Status of identification 0 0 This parameter is described in chapter Parameter optimization with temperature controllers 22 0 LMN_P REAL Proportionality component 0 0 The P part of the manipulated variable is shown on the LMN_P parameter 26 0 LMN_1I REAL Integral component 0 0 The I action component of the manipulated variable is displayed at the LMN_I parameter 30 0 LMN_D REAL Derivative component 0 0
141. d variable is achieved by setting a negative proportional action gain at the GAIN parameter The sign of this parameter value is defined by the direction of control action of the controller P Action Control The l action and the D action components are deactivated at the P action controller This means that the manipulated value also equals 0 when the Negative deviation ER 0 If an operating point is to be 0 i e if a numerical value is to be set for the manipulated variable at negative deviation zero this can be done via the operating point e Operating point automatic The operating point is set to the current manual manipulated variable at the manual automatic changeover of the controller e Operating point not automatic You can configure the operating point parameter Example Operating point OP 5 results in a manipulated variable of 5 at Negative deviation ER 0 P_SEL T ER Ti Automatic INN not automatic Operating point Figure 3 15 P action controller with operating point setting via l action element ER Manipulated variable Manipulated variable ER t gt t Figure 3 16 Step response of the P action controller FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 3 17 How Does the FM 355 Control 3 4 Controller PI Control The D action component is deactivated at the Pl action controller A PI action controller adjusts the outp
142. disturbance correction an adaptation of the controller to the time response of the controlled system is required Feedback structures are used to this purpose Depending on the feedback circuit structure this can have a proportional action P proportional derivative action PD proportional integral action PI or proportional integral derivative action PID If a jump function to the controller input exists jump responses arise under the condition that the delay times of the controller are negligibly small and that the controller reacts very rapidly P action Controller Step function on the controller input gt Input variable t A y Step response of the continuous controller x Output variable t A y 100 Step response of the pulse controller 0 gt Output variable t Figure 2 5 The jump response of a P action controller FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 2 7 Information for the controller adjustment 2 3 Control Response at Different Feedback Structures Equation for P action controller Output variable and input variable are directly proportional meaning Output variable change Proportional action gain x Input variable change or y GAIN x Xw PD action controller A x Step function on the controller input gt Input variable t A y Step response of the TM_LAG continuous controlle
143. ds backwards switching signals Mixing control The mixing control is a control structure whereby the setpoint for the entire quantity SP is calculated as a percentage of the desired number of parts of the individual controlled components The total of the mixing factors FAC must be 1 100 FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Glossary 3 Glossary Negative deviation The negative deviation is a function to form the negative deviation ER SP PV At the reference junction the difference between the desired setpoint and the actual existing process value is formed This value is transmitted to the control algorithm as an input Old description Control deviation P controller P algorithm Algorithm for calculating an output signal whereby characteristics exist with a proportionate connection between the negative deviation and the change in manipulated variable remaining negative deviation not to be used on dead time sections Parallel structure The parallel structure is a special kind of signal processing in the controller type of mathematical processing The P and D parts are calculated as interaction free and parallel and are then added up Physical standardization gt standardization PI controller PI algorithm Algorithm for calculating an output signal where the change to the manipulated variable is made up from a part proportionate to the negative devi
144. during the start up FM 355 closed loop control module 7 24 Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Implementing the FM 355 in the User Program Example 7 7 The PID_PAR function block During operation you want to change the ramp up time for the reference variable as well as use different analog input values as the actual value depending on the process state e Call the PID_PAR FB with COM_RST TRUE in the start up of the CPU e In order to configure the ramp up time for the reference variable to 10 0 call the PID_PAR FB during operation with INDEX_R 30 VALUE_R 10 0 and INDEX_I 0 e f you want to configure the analog input value 4 of the module as the actual value during runtime call the FB PID_PAR with INDEX_R 0 INDEX_I 50 and VALUE_ 4 Changeable Parameters Table 7 1 List of the REAL and INT parameters that can be changed with the PID_PAR FB Data type Description Index number No parameter selected 0 REAL Filter time constant for analog input 1 REAL End of measurement 100 2 REAL Beginning of measurement 0 3 REAL Polygon Interpolation value 1 input side 4 REAL Polygon Interpolation value 2 input side 5 REAL Polygon Interpolation value 3 input side 6 REAL Polygon Interpolation value 4 input side 7 REAL Polygon Interpolation value 5 input side 8 REAL Polygon Interpolation value 6 input side 9 REAL
145. e L Terminal diagram i ag junction temperature with Pt 100 Figure 9 2 Connection diagram of the analog inputs FM 355 closed loop control module 9 4 Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Properties of Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs 9 2 Properties of the Analog Inputs Block Diagram The following figure shows the block diagram of the analog inputs The input impedance is determined by the set measuring range Channel activation Power source CH 1 CH 2 no 1 ADC A ee gt Processing in external a The FM 355 compensa E tion npe Configured CH3 Da compensation eo CH4 gt L VDC internal 7 power supply Figure 9 3 Block diagram of the analog inputs See also Basic Structure of the FM 355 Page FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 9 5 Properties of Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs 9 3 Properties of the Analog Outputs Continuous Action Controllers 9 3 Properties of the Analog Outputs Continuous Action Controllers Properties The analog outputs of the FM 355 C have the following properties e 4 outputs e The output channels can be programmed as Voltage output Current output e Resolution 12 bits e Programmable diagnostics Note When you switch the supply voltage L off
146. e 1 Place the CD in the CD drive of your PG PC 2 Under Windows 95 NT launch the dialog for installing software by double clicking on the Software icon in Control panel 3 In the dialog box select the CD drive and then the setup exe file and start installation process 4 Follow the on screen step by step instructions of the installation program The following will be installed on your PG PC e Parameterization interface e Function blocks e Program examples e Online help Program examples The program examples can be found in the STEP 7 catalog in the sub catalog Examples in the project FM_PIDEx Reading the Readme file Important up to date information about the provided software can be found in a Readme file This file is located in the start window of the SIMATIC Manager FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 6 1 Parameter Configuration of the FM 355 6 2 Contiguring the hardware 6 2 Procedure 6 3 Procedure 6 2 Configuring the hardware Configuration assumes that you have set up a project in which you can save the configuration Refer to the Basic Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 user manual for more information on configuring modules The following briefly explains the most important steps 1 Select a subrack and arrange this OOo A OO N Launch the SIMATIC Manager and then call the configuration table in your project O
147. e is at its lower limit For step controllers only In para meter configu ration mask 56 7 LMNSOPON 1 BOOL Manipulated signal operation on FALSE If the bit on the input Manipulated value signal operation on is set the signals LMNUP_OP and LMNDN_OP are adopted as the manipulated value signals For step controllers only 57 0 LMNUP_OP 1 BOOL Manipulated signal up operation FALSE If LMNSOPON is set the value at the input Manipulated value signal up operation as the manipulated value signal For step controllers only 57 1 LMNDN_OP 1 BOOL Manipulated signal down operation FALSE If LANSOPON is set the value at the input Manipulated value signal down operation as the manipulated value signal For step controllers only 11 14 FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Assignment of the Instance DBs 11 1 Instance DB of the PID_FM FB Addr 57 3 Parameter LMNRS_ON Data type BOOL Comment English Simulation of the repeated manipulated value on Permitted range of values Default setting FALSE Explanation If no position feedback is available this can be simulated The function is switched on on the input simulation of the position feedback on The configuration tool controller optimization also has access to these p
148. e 50 Hz operation e 60 Hz operation This configuration is carried out in the parameterization interface button Module parameters FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 3 5 How Does the FM 355 Control 3 3 FM 355 inputs Toggling between Celsius Fahrenheit Temperatures can be measured in either C or F This configuration is carried out in the parameterization interface button Module parameters Reference junction If you have set a thermocouple element as a sensor on an analog input you can connect a Pt 100 at the reference junction input of the module in order to compensate for the reference junction temperature with thermocouple elements Alternatively a fixed reference junction temperature can be configured This configuration is carried out in the parameterization interface button Module parameters When using the reference junction input the scanning time of each controller extends by the conversion time for the reference junction input Analog value conditioning The analog value conditioning offers various configurable possibilities of preparing the input signals The following table gives an overview of these parameters and the values that can be set Parameters Values that can be set Note Resolution 12 bits Conversion time 20 ms 50 Hz 14 bits Conversion time 162 3 ms 60 Hz Conversion time 100 ms Filters ON OFF Filter 1st arrang
149. e RET_VAL includes the 2nd and 3rd bytes from the STATUS parameter of the SFB 52 53 RET_VALU can be evaluated if an error is reported via the QMOD_F see reference manual 2 FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 11 27 Assignment of the Instance DBs 11 5 Instance DB of the CH_DIAG FB 11 5 Instance DB of the CH_DIAG FB Introduction The FB CH_DIAG is needed to read out additional channel specific diagnostic variables from the module The following tables list the parameters of this instance DB e Input parameters e Output parameters Input Parameters Table 11 10 Input parameters of the instance DB for the CH_DIAG FB Addr 0 0 Parameter Data Comment Permitted range of Default type English values setting MOD_ADDR_ INT FM 355 455 256 module address Explanation The module address that resulted from the configuration with STEP 7 is given at this input In the parameter assign ment screen form 2 0 CHANNEL INT Channel Number 1to4 1 The number of the controller channel to which the instance DB refers is configured at the Channel number input 4 0 SP_R REAL Setpoint ratio 0 0 If a ratio controller is set the input value of the setpoint value is assigned to the parameter 8 0 PV_R REAL Process variable 0 0 ratio The parameter only has the following value assigne
150. e at the manipulated value during the changeover from manual to automatic mode The manipulated value remains unchanged during the changeover from manual to automatic mode Manipulated value correction is not active when a pure P action controller with fixed operating point is implemented automatic is not activated in the PID action controller mask Controller Output of the Continuous Action Controller external manipulated variable gt J Effective Switch manipulated external variable manipulated Manipulated value variable S4 BHEF REL Manipulated Switch Switching Limiting Split range variable A correction safety manipulated gt variable gt I e Correction input Manipulated variable B Manipulated variable follow up Figure 3 21 Controller output of the continuous action controller FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 3 21 How Does the FM 355 Control 3 4 Controller Split Range Function 3 22 The split range function is used to control two control valves with one manipulated variable The split range function generates the two output signals Manipulated value A and Manipulated value B from the manipulated value LMN as the input signal The following figure shows the effect of the parameters for the output manipulated value A Manipulated variable A output signal Start of ou
151. e configuration tool 2 operation on circle diagram has access to the through parameter Set value operation on If the bit is set the value SP_OP is used as the setpoint value 140 1 LMNOP_ON BOOL Manipulated FALSE The configuration tool 2 value operation circle diagram has on access to the through parameter Manipulated variable operation on If the bit is set the value LMN_OP is used as the manipulated value FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 11 51 Assignment of the Instance DBs 11 8 Assignment of the DBs for Operator Control and Monitoring via OP Data type Address Parameter 140 2 LOAD_PAR BOOL Comment English Load control parameter to FM 355 455 Permitted range of values Default setting FALSE In the parameter assign ment Explanation screen form If the through parameter Load control parameter to FM 355 455 is set the control parameters are loaded into the module and the through parameter is reset 140 3 LOAD_OP BOOL Load operator parameter to FM 355 455 FALSE If the through parameter Load operator parameter to FM 355 455 is set the operating parameters are loaded into the module and the through parameter is reset 1 Control parameters Control parameters are downloaded to the module if the in out pa
152. e of Thermocouples The following points must be observed when connecting thermocouples Depending on where the reference junction is required either configured or external compensation can be used In case of configured compensation a configurable reference junction temperature of the module is used for comparison In the case of external compensation the temperature of the reference junction of the thermocouples is taken into consideration by means of a Pt 100 This Pt 100 is connected to Connections 10 and 11 at the left hand front connector of the module whereby the Pt 100 must be applied to the reference junction of the thermocouples Its power supply must be taken from Channel 3 Connections 12 and 13 of the left hand front connector The following restrictions apply e External compensation with connection of the Pt 100 to Connections 10 and 11 of the module can only be carried out at one thermocouple type This means that all channels operating with external compensation must use the same type Abbreviations Used The abbreviations used in the figures below have the following meaning M Measuring line positive M Measuring line negative COMP Compensating terminal positive COMP Compensating terminal negative M Ground terminal L Power supply 24 V DC Connection Alternatives for Thermocouples The following figures show the various possibilities of connecting thermocouples to external and configured compensation
153. e op_par and cont_par parameters in the instance data block of the function block In order to allow data transfer without high run times in the CPU transfer is normally when LOAD_OP FALSE carried out via direct I O accesses Since only four bytes are available per channel in the I O address area of the module the data are multiplexed It can therefore take up to three cycles of the CPU or of the FM 355 until the operating values have been transferred to the FM 355 and become effective there the respectively longer cycle is decisive If you want the operating values to be transferred immediately in one cycle of the CPU or of the FM 355 to the FM 355 you can set the LOAD_OP parameter to TRUE The transmission then takes place by means of SFC WR_REC SFB RDREC the FB requires more time for this refer to Appendix A 2 Technical specifications of function blocks After a successful data transfer the LOAD_OP parameter of the PID_FM FB is reset to FALSE This can take a few call cycles if the FM 355 is used in distributed I Os 7 2 2 Monitoring via the PID_FM FB Reading the Process Values The FB PID_FM cyclically reads the process values e g process value manipulated variable from the FM 355 Process values are all the output parameters of the function block after the out_par parameter The PID_FM FB also reads the process values via direct I O accesses if READ_VAR FALSE This transfer requires less run time but entails the fun
154. eaeess 12 1 Error display from the group error LED ou eee eee rere reser eter eneeeteeeeeenaee 12 2 Triggering diagnostic interrupts cececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeceeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeseneaeeseeeaeeraaees 12 3 Measuring transformer erfor ceeceeeeceeeeee eee eeeeeeceeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeaaeeeseeaaeeseeaeeeseeaeeseeaneesaie 12 6 1 EXAMP S n n ree cere reer ee reer a E E pee eer pera ce eres aeeer eee 13 1 13 1 Application example for the FM 355 S 0 ccecececeececeeceeeeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeseceaeeeeeeesesanaeeeeeeesetenaeess 13 1 13 2 Application example for the FM 355 C ccececeecececeeceeeeeeeeeceeceeeeeeesecacaeeeseeeseeanaeeeeeeeseeeneees 13 6 13 3 Application Example for Diagnostics cccceeececeeceeeeeeeseeeceeeeeeeseaaeaeeeeeeesesanaeeeeeeeeeeeaeess 13 10 13 4 Interconnection example for a cascade control cceceeeeceeceececeeeeeeeeaeceeeeesesnnaeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 13 11 13 5 Interconnection example for a ratio CONtIOI ccccceceeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeeseeenaeeeeeeseteenaees 13 12 13 6 Interconnection example for a mixed control ccccceceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeceeeeseeseaeeeeeeeeteeaees 13 13 A go E A Pee ee eee er eve A 1 A The FB 29 PID_PAR function DIOCK ssscssssssssssssssessssesssssesssssessssesssseessseeesseseessesentceaseess A 2 Instance DB of the FB 29 sect cesteevccstisevesicaacevahlideddecsldacecdavnedv callie tee dadedvelhaece teas verslic
155. ed output In the para meter assign ment screen form 122 3 QL_ALM BOOL Low limit alarm reached FALSE The actual value or the controlled variable is monitored for four limits Exceeding of the limit H_LALM is signaled at the Lower limit alarm triggered output 122 4 QLMN_HLM BOOL High limit of manipulated value reached FALSE The manipulated variable is always limited to an high and a low limit The high limit of manipulated value reached output displays the exceeding of the upper limit this does not apply to step action controllers without analog position feedback 122 5 QLMN_LLM BOOL Low limit of manipulated value reached FALSE The manipulated variable is always limited to an high and a low limit The low limit of manipulated value reached output displays the falling short of the low limit this does not apply to step action controllers without analog position feedback 122 6 QSPINTON BOOL Internal setpoint on FALSE The output Internal setpoint on indicates that SP_INT was transferred to the module FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 11 45 Assignment of the Instance DBs 11 8 Assignment of the DBs for Operator Control and Monitoring via OP Addr 123 0 Parameter QPARA_F Data type BOOL Comment English P
156. ed by applying tangents to the maximum value and the inflection point of the step response Recording the transition function up to the maximum value is not possible in many cases because the controlled variable may not exceed certain values The rate of rise Vmax is therefore used for the controlled system From the ratio Tu To or Tu X Vmax Xmax it is possible to estimate the suitability of the controlled system for controlling The following applies Tu Tg Suitability of the controlled system for controlling lt 0 1 can be controlled well 0 1 to 0 3 can still be controlled gt 0 3 difficult to control Controlled systems can be judged on the basis of the following values Tu lt 0 5 min Tg lt 5 min fast controlled system Tu gt 0 5 min Tg gt 5 min slow controlled system FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Information for the controller adjustment 2 1 Characteristic Values of the Controlled System Characteristic values of important temperature controlled systems Controlled Type of controlled system Delay time Tu Recovery time Tg Rate of rise Vmax variable Temperature Small electrically heated furnace 0 5 to 1 min 5 to 15 min Up to 60 K min Large electrically heated annealing 1 to 5 min 10 to 20 min Up to 20 K min furnace Large gas heated annealing furnace 0 2 to 5 min 3 to 60 min 1 to 30 K mi
157. ed on After the end of identification the identification result can be read out via the IDSTATUS parameter of the CH_DIAG FB FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Assignment of the Instance DBs 11 1 Instance DB of the PID_FM FB Addr 40 0 Parameter QSPOPON Data type BOOL Comment English Setpoint operation on Permitted range of values Default setting FALSE Explanation The output set value operation on shows if the set value is being operated by the configuration tool If the bit is set the value SP_OP is used as the setpoint value In the parameter assign ment screen form 40 1 QLMNSAFE BOOL Safety operation FALSE If the output Safety mode is set the safety manipulated value is output as the manipulated value 40 2 QLMNOPON BOOL Manipulated value operation on FALSE The output manipulated value operation on shows if the set value is being operated by the configuration tool If the bit is set the value LMN_OP is used as the manipulated value 40 3 QLMNTRK BOOL Follow up operation FALSE The output Follow up mode indicates whether the manipulated value is tracked via an analog input 40 4 QLMN_RE BOOL Manual 1 Automatic 0 FALSE The output manual 1 automatic 0 indicates whether or not the manipulated value i
158. eference Junction The thermocouples can be extended from their connecting point by means of equalizing lines to a point with a temperature which remains constant as far as possible reference junction These compensating wires are made of the same materials as the thermocouple wires The incoming lines are made of copper Ensure that the polarity of the equalizing lines is not reversed since large measuring errors will otherwise arise Compensation of the Reference Junction Temperature The influence of temperature fluctuations at the reference junction can be compensated by measuring the reference junction temperature outside the module Measuring of the reference junction temperature The influence of the temperature on the reference junction of a thermocouple for example the terminal box can be equalized by measuring the reference junction temperature with a Pt 100 If the actual reference temperature differs from the comparison temperature the temperature dependent resistance changes A positive or negative compensation voltage occurs that is added to the thermo electromotive force Please note e The power supply of Channel 3 must be used to supply the constant current for the Pt 100 e Channel 3 can then not be used for Pt 100 measurement FM 355 closed loop control module 10 6 Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Connecting Measuring Transducers and Loads Actuators 10 2 Use of Thermocouples Us
159. ement the time Time constant in s response of which is established by the time constant Square root ON OFF To linearize encoder signals where the actual value is given as a physical variable that is in quadratic connection with the measured process variable Standardization bottom To convert the input signal into a top different physical unit by means of linear interpolation between the start value bottom and the end value top Polyline ON OFF To linearize encoder characteristic 13 support points can be chosen in Curves MA with current input mV with voltage input Note Standardization polyline The conversion of the unit mA or mV into a physical unit takes place either via the polyline or if this is not switched on via standardization The polyline is used to linearize a free thermocouple element or for any other linearization 3 6 FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 How Does the FM 355 Control 3 3 FM 355 inputs 3 3 2 Digital Inputs Operating Modes The digital inputs are used to switch between operating modes of the individual controller channels The direction of control action of the digital inputs can be configured The following settings are possible for each of the eight digital inputs e High active e Low active or open This configuration is carried out in the parameter configuration interface Module p
160. en input M terminal and central grounding 75 V DC point 60 VAC e Between the analog inputs and Mana Ucm 25VDC Atsignal 0V 500 VDC e Insulation tested with FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 B 3 Data Sheet B 2 Technical Specifications FM 355 B 4 Current consumption e From the backplane bus e From L no load Continuous action controller Step controller Typ 50 mA max 75 mA Typ 260 mA max 310 mA Typ 220 mA max 270 mA Power dissipation of the module e Continuous action controller e Step controller typ 6 5 W max 7 8 W typ 5 5 W max 6 9 W Status Interrupts Diagnostics Status display Interrupts e Limit value interrupt e Diagnostics interrupt Yes green LED per digital input channel yes configurable yes configurable Diagnostic functions e Fault indication on the module in the event of a group fault e Reading diagnostic information Yes configurable Yes red LED Yes Backup operation Yes display through yellow LED Interference Suppression Error Limits Inputs Interference voltage suppression for f n x f1 1 f1 interference frequency e Common mode noise Vpp lt 2 5 V gt 70 dB e Series mode interference peak value of disturbance gt 40 dB lt rated input range Crosstalk between the inputs e At50 Hz 50 dB e At60 Hz 50 dB Oper
161. en the input variable leaves the sensitivity range does the output change by the same values at the input variable see the figure below This results in a transferred signal being corrupted also outside the dead band However this is accepted in order to avoid step changes at the limits of the dead band The corruption corresponds to the value of the dead band width and can therefore be controlled easily Error signal on A dead band output Error signal on the dead band input Dead band width Figure 3 20 Dead band FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 How Does the FM 355 Control Controller Output 3 4 Controller The controller output block of the control unit has a different structure at the continuous action controller and at the three operating modes of the step controller Various interconnection possibilities are implemented at the controller output for the manipulated value the tracking input and the safety manipulated value manipulated value switchover To avoid the manipulated value adopting illegal values for the process a limit is specified The split range function generates from the manipulated value as an input signal two differently standardized output signals manipulated value A and manipulated value B This way for example two values can be controlled with one manipulated value The manipulated value correction prevents a step chang
162. en used to control systems with motor controlled actuators It can therefore also be used for familiarizing and training You approximate the controlled system to the properties of the real process by selecting the parameters correspondingly The configuration tool can be used to find a set of suitable controller characteristics through identification of the model system Functions of the Example Program The example Example 355 S essentially comprises the two function blocks PID_FM FB 31 and PROC_S FB 100 PID_FM embodies the step controller while PROC_S simulates a controlled system with the function elements Valve and PT3 refer to the figure below Information about the position of the actuator and if appropriate stop signals that have been reached are transferred to the machine in addition to the controlled variable DISV Setpoint Step action controller Actual value Stop signals Position feedback Controller Controlled system Figure 13 1 Example Example 355 S control circuit The PROC_S function block simulates a series connection that consists of the integrating actuator and three first order time delays refer to the following figure The disturbance variable DISV is always added to the output signal of the actuator so that system disturbances can be fed forward manually at this point The static system gain can be determined by means of the GAIN factor FM 355 closed loop cont
163. eneatiadenaed cpus A 7 A 3 The FB 30 CJ_T_PAR function DIOCK c cccecceceeeeeceece eee ceceeeeeeeeseeeeceesaeseaeseaeeneneeeeeeaes A 10 A 4 Instance DB Of the FB 90 secivcssscecccstecectsddaneccanecenivteddeteccunnetesacuedebiededveidaaslecdensceedadaaceeadecdenset fs A 12 A 5 List Of RET VALU MeSSAGES i cisccecciseccugi cs eescecdeendy idccdetegsedteestecdeenetadechededdeeestileet EA A 15 B Data SMO Cte a EA esos env E E spud taped sdeeschasctneadea aaedocisvaasiiaearived B 1 Technical Specifications S7 300 B 2 Technical Specifications FM 355 ccssssssssssssssssesssssssessnssseeeeestuienssssseeesesstunnsssseeeeesstenee B 3 B 3 Technical Specifications of Function BIOCKS ccccccceeeeeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeceaeeeeeeeetenaees B 4 Technical Data of Parameter Configuration Interface eee ceeeceeee eens ee eeeeeeeeetteeeeetneeeeneas B 10 Cc Spare PAINS oes ics chat cain daa du cceeetesbaadlectedaantadeushs Eaa E aa EAE aE RAEE E RE EEEE KAENI AE ENE ENE EENET C 1 Spare PAINS cissavececcassseanaasvedes cxsadduaaveaecccaeesdddeesaassedeiiesauddaaungedsnas aaa daia ei daadaa a aaa Gadda ana a C 1 D FRETCREN COS 6 voec cases apescis scans ac seessceeedy ese A D 1 D 1 EEC E E TETT ETE E D 1 CI OSSAIY secs cae Ee a R a E a E aO E a O Glossary 1 WIN OX E e E A AEE T E E A A O E E A EAE A T Index 1 FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 ix Table of content
164. ensuusssssssseeseuiunsssneeeeeeie 7 20 7 7 The PID_PAR function DIOCK ss s sssssssssssssssussssssssssseesesusussssnssesnssussnssssssenssnssaneseessses 7 23 7 8 The CJT PAR Function BOCK sires viicacecictccice tedeucea nE EE 1 29 7 9 PROFINET Operation c ccccsesesesescscsescscecscsssesesesssssssssesesesesesesesesesssssessssssessesusesesetesensene sees Commissioning the FM 355 miscaia a a R Properties of Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs 0 2 0 0 eee eeecceeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeaeeeeesaeesensaeeeeaeees 9 1 9 1 Properties of the Digital Inputs and Outputs Step Controllers ccccccseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 9 1 9 2 Properties of the Analog Inputs 2 c cccc cece ceeeeeeee eee ceeeeeeeeeaeeceeeeeeeseneeeeeeeesteetseeeeneeeandbes 9 3 9 3 Properties of the Analog Outputs Continuous Action Controllers cccceceecseeeeteens Connecting Measuring Transducers and Loads Actuators cceessceeeesseeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeneeenaes 10 1 10 1 Connecting Measuring Transducers to Analog INpUtS 0 ec ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeettaeeeeetnaeeeee 10 1 10 2 Use of Thermocouples eeeepn ene ee erm cr tr terran ree tere re Tere nnan mnnn 10 5 10 3 Connecting Voltage Sensors Current Sensors and Resistance Thermometers 10 10 10 4 Connecting Loads Actuators to Analog Outputs 0 0 0 cee eeneeeeeenee cece ene ee ee taeeeeetaeeeentaeeeee 10 13 10 5 Connec
165. erating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Implementing the FM 355 in the User Program 7 6 The CH_DIAG function block Multiplying effective setpoint Switch Ramp Limiting Normali safety value zing Actual value D Process value A effective process value gt D input Disturbance variable Figure 7 16 Displayed diagnostic values of the negative deviation e LMN P is the P part of the PID controller see following figure e LMN is the part of the PID controller see following figure e LMN_D is the D part of the PID controller see following figure FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 7 21 Implementing the FM 355 in the User Program 7 6 The CH_DIAG function block See also 7 22 IDSTATUS effective setpoint WA O effective process Temperature value controller effective manipulated variable gt Error signal 7 Dead zone gt D input K Manipulated variable follow up Disturbance variable Figure 7 17 Displayed values of the control algorithm external manipulated variable NO X effective Switch manipulated external variable manipulate anipulated value N variable X Manipulated Switch Switching Limiting Split range variable A correction safety manipulated ariable gt TRACKPER Manipulated
166. ermitted range of values Default setting FALSE Explanation The manipulated variable is always limited to an high and a low limit The low limit of manipulated value reached output displays the falling short of the low limit this does not apply to step action controllers without analog position feedback In the parameter assign ment screen form 38 6 QPARA_F BOOL Parameter assignment error FALSE The module checks the validity of the parameters A parameter configuration error is displayed at the Parameter configuration error output You can also read out these parameter assignment errors by using the PLC gt Parameter Assignment Error menu of the parameter configuration interface 38 7 QCH_F BOOL Channel error FALSE The output Channel error is set if the controller channel cannot supply any valid results Channel error e g wire break is also set if QPARA_F 1 or QMOD_F 1 If QCH_F TRUE then the precise error information in the diagnostic record DS1 of the module is read off 39 0 QUPRLM BOOL Limit of positive setpoint inclination reached FALSE The setpoint is limited in positive and negative inclination If the output Limit of positive setpoint inclination triggered is set the positive setpoint inclination is limited FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03
167. ers Refer to the menu PLC gt Parameter Assignment Error 1 0 3 Module class Always has 8 assigned Channel specific Is set if the module can supply additional diagnostics channel information and if a channel error exists refer to DS 1 Byte 7 to 12 2 3 Watchdog time out Hardware fault 8 x 33 3 2 EPROM error Module defective 8 x 42 4 ADC DAC fault Module defective 8 x 44 Assignments of Diagnostics Record DS1 12 4 The diagnostics record DS1 consists of 16 bytes The first 4 bytes are identical with diagnostics record DSO The following table shows the assignment of the remaining bytes All unlisted bits are not significant and are set to zero Table 12 2 Assignment of Bytes 4 to 12 of the diagnostics record DS1 Byte Bit Meaning Note Event No 4 0 Channel type Always has 75H assigned 5 0 Length of the diagnostic Always has 8 assigned information 6 0 7 Number of channels Always has 5 assigned 4 controllers 1 reference channel 0 7 Channel error vector One bit is assigned to each channel 0 Analog input hardware fault Channel specific 8 x BO 1 Unused diagnostics 8 x B1 n channel 1 2 Analog input wire break only 8 x B2 area 4 to 20 mA 3 Unused 8 x B3 4 Analog input below 8 x B4 measuring range 5 Analog input measuring 8 x B5 range violation overrange 6 Analog output wire breakage Only with the 8 x B6 current output of the C controller
168. es SIMATIC products fulfill the requirement if you observe the installation guidelines described in the manuals during installation and operation FM 355 closed loop control module B 2 Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Data Sheet B 2 Technical Specitications FM 355 B 2 Technical Specifications FM 355 Technical Specifications of the FM 355 Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D mm 80 x 125 x 120 Weight Approx 470 g Module Specific Data Number of digital inputs 8 Number of digital outputs 8 only step controller Number of analog inputs 4 Number of analog outputs 4 only continuous action controller Length of cable e Digital signals unshielded Max 600 m e Digital signals shielded Max 1000 m 200 m e Analog signals shielded 50 m at 80 mV and thermocouples Voltages Currents Potentials Rated load voltage L 24V DC e Permitted range 20 4 to 28 8 V e Polarity reversal protection for input supply Yes e Polarity reversal protection for output supply Yes Number of digital inputs that can be triggered simultaneously e Horizontal mounting 8 up to 60 C e Vertical mounting 8 up to 40 C Total current of the digital outputs e Horizontal mounting up to 40 C max 0 4 A up to 60 C max 0 4 A e Vertical mounting up to 40 C max 0 4 A Electrical isolation e To the backplane bus Yes optocoupler e Between the channels No Permissible potential difference e Betwe
169. f the closed loop circuit after a setpoint value change of 60 percent refer to the figure below The table contains the currently set values of the relevant parameters for controller and controlled system Parameter Type Parameterization Description Controller GAIN REAL 0 31 P action coefficient Tl TIME 19 190 s Integration time MTR_TM TIME 20s Motor actuating time PULSE_TM TIME 100 ms Minimum pulse time BREAK_TM TIME 100 ms Minimum break time DEADB_ON BOOL TRUE Dead Band On DEADB_W REAL 0 5 Dead band width Controlled system CYCLE TIME 100 ms Sampling time GAIN REAL 1 5 Servo gain MTR_TM TIME 20s Motor actuating time TM_LAG1 TIME 10s Time lag 1 TM_LAG2 TIME 10s Time lag 2 TM_LAG3 TIME 10s Time lag 3 Step Response 100 Setpoint i i Cal Actual Value 50 ap 4 ee aaa _ T00 i i i i i i 1 i i 15 53 15 54 15 55 15 56 15 57 15 58 15 59 16 00 16 01 Figure 13 4 Control loop with step controller after setpoint step change FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 13 5 Examples 13 2 Application example for the FM 355 C 13 2 Application example for the FM 355 C Introduction The project FM_PIDEx can be found in the example SIMATIC 300 Station2 C and it enables you to operate the FM 355 C in a section that is simulated in the CPU This means that y
170. f the FM 355 C DAC FT A Ht I MANA Q2 Processing in MANA CH2 the FM 355 2 T V ens I MANA T ane i MANA L internal VDC power M supply Block diagram MANA All channels are connected internally Figure 9 5 Block diagram of the analog outputs continuous action controllers See also Basic Structure of the FM 355 Page FM 355 closed loop control module 9 8 Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Connecting Measuring Transducers 4 0 and Loads Actuators 10 1 Connecting Measuring Transducers to Analog Inputs Introduction Depending on the measuring type used you can connect various measuring transducers to the analog inputs of the FM 355 e Voltage sensor e Current sensor as 4 wire measuring transducer and 2 wire measuring transducer e Resistance In this section you will find out how to connect the measuring transducers and what to watch for when doing so Lines for Analog Signals You should use shielded and twisted pair lines for the analog signals This reduces the effect of interference You should ground the shield of the analog lines at both ends of the line Any potential difference between the cable ends may cause an equipotential current on the shield and thus disturbance on analog signals If this is the case you should only ground the shield at one end of the line Reference Point Mana When operating the FM 355
171. feedback The start value of the simulation is entered at the parameter Only in the case of step controllers without analog position feedback FM 355 closed loop control module 11 38 Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Assignment of the Instance DBs 11 8 Assignment of the DBs for Operator Control and Monitoring via OP Addr 84 0 Parameter SAFE_ON 2 Data type BOOL Comment English Safety position on Permitted range of values Default setting FALSE Explanation If the assume safety position input is set a security value is adopted as the manipulated value Note The actuating signal processing via LMNDN_OP LMNUP_OP and LMNSOPON with step controllers has greater priority than the safety manipulated variable In the parameter assign ment screen form 84 1 LMNTRKON 2 BOOL Match LMN from analog input FALSE If the input Track LMN via analog input is set the manipulated value is tracked to an analog input this does not apply to step action controllers without analog position feedback 84 2 LMN_REON 2 BOOL External manipulated value on FALSE If the input Switch external manipulated value on is set the external manipulated value LMN_RE is used as the manipulated value 84 3 LMNRHSRE 2 BOOL High limit signal of repeated manipulated value FALSE The si
172. figuration of an S7 300 We offer a range of courses to help get you started with the SIMATIC S7 programmable controller Please contact your local training center or the central training center in Nuremberg D 90327 Germany Tel 49 0 911 895 3200 FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Introduction Up to the minute Information The SIMATIC Customer Support offers you extensive additional information on the SIMATIC products via the on line services e You can obtain general current information On the Internet athttp www ad siemens de simatic e Current product information and downloads as an additional help On the Internet athttp www ad siemens de simatic cs Via the Bulletin Board System BBS in Nuremberg SIMATIC Customer Support Mailbox under 49 911 895 7100 To dial the mailbox use a modem with up to V 34 28 8 Kbps with the following parameter settings 8 N 1 ANSI or dial via ISDN x 75 64 Kbps Nuremberg SIMATIC BASIC Hotline Local time M F 7 00 a m to 5 00 p m Phone 49 180 5050 222 Fax 49 180 5050 223 Email techsupport ad siemens de GMT 1 00 Johnson City SIMATIC BASIC Hotline Local time M F 8 00 a m to 5 00 p m Phone 1 423 461 2522 Fax 1 423 461 2231 Email simatic hotline sea siemens com GMT 5 00 Singapore SIMATIC BASIC Hotline Local time Mo Fr 8 30 to 17 30 Phone
173. front connectors of the FM 355 Sou cccceeceeceeteetecneeeenees List of the REAL and INT parameters that can be changed with the PID_PAR FB List of the CPUs in which the PID_PAR FB can be used ccececececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaneneees Input parameters of the instance DB for the PID_FM FB ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeestnaeeeeees Output parameters of the instance DB for the PID_FM FB 0 cccceceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeseseaeees 11 3 I O parameters of the instance DB for the PID_FM FB 0 cccccceceeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeseeeecaeeeeess 1 11 Input parameters of the instance DB for the FUZ_355 FB cccceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeteeseneeeeees 1 21 Output parameters of the instance DB for the FUZ_355 FB eceeccscceceeeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeenaees 1 21 Input parameters of the instance DB for the FORCE355 FB cccccceeseceeeeeeeeeettceeeeeees 1 23 Output parameters of the instance DB to the FB FORCE355 cccccccseseeeeeeeteeteeteees 1 25 Input parameters of the instance DB for the READ_355 FB ccccccsecsecceceeeeeeettcteeeeees 1 26 Output parameters of the instance DB for the READ_355 FB ccccccessseeseeceeeteeteenees 11 26 Input parameters of the instance DB for the CH_DIAG FB ccccecseeesecceceeeeeteteeeeeeees 11 28 Output parameters of the instance DB for the CH_DIAG FB cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeceeteeeeeeneees 11 30 I
174. g Loads to an Analog Output Loads at an analog output have to be connected to Q and the reference point of the analog 10 14 circuit Mana Loads can only be connected to an analog output with a 2 wire connection The following figure shows the principle connection of loads to an analog output of an FM 355 C FM 355 Sees a yr M Q Processing in _J Logic DAC the FM 355 MANA CPU A so M H L M Q Ground bus Figure 10 10 Connecting a load to an FM 355 C FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Connecting Measuring Transducers and Loads Actuators 10 5 Connecting Loads Actuators to Digital Outputs 10 5 Connecting Loads Actuators to Digital Outputs Introduction Voltage can be supplied to loads actuators by means of the FM 355 S The following figure illustrates the principle Abbreviations Used The abbreviations used in the figure below have the following meaning Q Digital output Ri Load Actuator L Power supply 24 V DC M Ground terminal Connecting Loads Actuators to a Digital Output The following figure shows the connection in principle of loads actuators to a digital output of an FM 355 S FM 355 L Processing in ogie the FM 355 9 Figure 10 11 Connection
175. g and closing a valve The pulse controller serves to drive the non integrated elements e g switching a heating on or off Three step controller Controller with which the output variable can accept only three discreet states e g hot off cool or right standstill left FM 355 closed loop control module Glossary 6 Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Index A Action mechanisms Activated state Actual value Conditioning 3 14 Signal selection B 13 Actuators Connecting to analog output 10 13 Connecting to digital output 10 15 Adapting Analog inputs to line frequency 3 5 Analog inputs to sensors Address Start addresses Addressing Fixed address 4 2 Free Address 4 2 Analog input Connecting measuring transducers 10 2 Analog inputs Adapting to line frequency 3 5 Adapting to sensors 3 5 Block diagram 3 5 9 5 Connection diagram 9 4 Analog output Connecting loads actuators Analog outputs Block diagram Connection diagram Number Properties 9 Signal selection Signal type Analog outputs of the FM 355 C Analog signal Cables 5 Corruption Lines for 1 Shield 5 8 Analog value conditioning 0 1 FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Anti reset wind up Application example Diagnosis 13 10 FM 355 C Applications Backup mode 3 40 Basic parameters 3 4 Basic structure 355 Bloc
176. g onthe 0 0 Refer to the section parameter respective The PID_PAR parameter Function Block Output Parameters Table 11 13 Output parameters of the instance DB for the PID_PAR FB Addr Parameter Data Comment Permitted range of Default Explanation In the type English values setting parameter assign ment screen form 16 0 RET_VALU WORD Return value 0 RET_VALU includes SFC 58 59 the return value SFB 52 53 RET_VAL of the SFC 58 59 With the block for PROFINET Mode the RET_VAL includes the 2nd and 3rd bytes from the STATUS parameter of the SFB 52 53 RET_VALU can be evaluated if an error is reported via the QMOD F see reference manual 2 18 0 BUSY BOOL BUSY value of FALSE If BUSY TRUE the SFC WR_REC parameters have not SFB WRREC yet been transferred from the module at distributed I Os The call of the PID_PAR FB should then be repeated in the next cycle See also Page FM 355 closed loop control module 11 32 Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Assignment of the Instance DBs 11 7 Instance DB of the C _T_PAR FB 11 7 Instance DB of the CJU_T PAR FB Introduction The FB JC_T_PAR is used to change the configured reference junction temperature on the module on line The following tables list the parameters of this instance DB e Input parameters e Output parameters Input Parameters Table 11 14 Input parameters of the instance DB for the CJ_T_PAR FB
177. g parameter assign ment screen form 26 0 RET_VALU WORD Return value 0 RET_VALU includes SFC 58 59 the return value SFB 52 53 RET_VAL of the SFC 58 59 With the block for PROFINET Mode the RET_VAL includes the 2nd and 3rd bytes from the STATUS parameter of the SFB 52 53 RET_VALU can be evaluated if an error is reported via the QMOD_F see reference manual 2 FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 11 25 Assignment of the Instance DBs 11 4 Instance DB of the READ_355 FB 11 4 Instance DB of the READ_355 FB Introduction The READ_355 FB is required to read analog or digital input values out of the FM 355 The following tables list the parameters of this instance DB e Input parameters e Output parameters Input Parameters Table 11 8 Input parameters of the instance DB for the READ_355 FB Addr Parameter Data Comment Permitted range of Default Explanation In the type English values setting parameter assign ment screen form 0 0 MOD_ADDR INT FM 355 455 256 This input contains the module address module address resulting from the configuration with STEP 7 Output Parameters Table 11 9 Output parameters of the instance DB for the READ_355 FB Addr Parameter Data type Comment Permitted range of Default Explanation In the English values setting parameter assign ment screen form 2 0 CJ
178. gin at the top Also screw tight unassigned terminals tightening torque 0 6 to 0 8 Nm 6 Tighten the strain relief clamp for the cable chain 7 Push the front connector into the operating position 8 9 Label the terminals on the labeling strip Apply the cable shields to the shield contact element or to the shield bar The following figure shows the module with the shielded cables and the shield contact element Figure 5 6 Connection of the shielded cables to the FM 355 FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 5 9 Wiring the FM 355 5 3 Module Status After First Being Switched On 5 3 Module Status After First Being Switched On Characteristics The state in which the module is after the power supply has turned on and when data have not been transferred yet state of delivery is characterized by the following 5 10 Analog inputs No execution Analog outputs continuous action controller 0 mA Digital outputs step controller Zero deactivated No controller active Diagnostic interrupt disabled FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Parameter Configuration of the FM 355 6 6 1 Installing the Parameterization Interface Prerequisites STEP 7 must be correctly installed on your PG PC Delivery format The software is delivered on CD ROM Procedure To install the softwar
179. gnal Manipulated valve on high stop is switched on the high stop signal of the position feedback input LMNRHSRE TRUE means The control valve is at its upper limit For step controllers only FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 11 39 Assignment of the Instance DBs 11 8 Assignment of the DBs for Operator Control and Monitoring via OP Addr 84 4 Parameter LMNRLSRE 2 Data type BOOL Comment English Low limit signal of repeated manipulated value Permitted range of values Default setting FALSE Explanation The signal Manipulated valve on low stop is switched on the low stop signal of the position feedback input LMNRLSRE TRUE means The control valve is at its lower limit For step controllers only In the parameter assign ment screen form 84 5 LMNSOPON 2 BOOL Manipulated signal operation on FALSE If the bit on the input Manipulated value signal operation on is set the signals LMNUP_OP and LMNDN_OP are adopted as the manipulated value signals For step controllers only 84 6 LMNUP_OP 2 BOOL Manipulated signal up operation FALSE If LMNSOPON is set the value at the input Manipulated value signal up operation as the manipulated value signal For step controllers only 84 7 LMNDN_OP 2 BOOL Manipulated sig
180. hannel number Status LED green Figure 9 1 Wiring diagram and block diagram of the digital inputs and outputs step controllers The LEDs of the digital outputs are not controlled and do not have any meaning See also Basic Structure of the FM 355 Page FM 355 closed loop control module 9 2 Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Properties of Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs 9 2 Properties of the Analog Inputs 9 2 Properties of the Analog Inputs Properties The analog inputs of the FM 355 have the following properties 4 inputs Measured value resolution 12 bits 14 bits Measuring method selectable per analog input Voltage Current Resistance Temperature Measuring range selection per analog input Programmable diagnostics Programmable diagnostic interrupt Limit monitoring Programmable interrupt when limit is exceeded Current Measurement At current measurement an external measuring resistor of 50 Q has to be connected to the analog inputs between M and M Reference Input COMP COMP If you connect a Pt 100 to the analog inputs COMP and COMP to measure the reference junction temperature you have to supply current to this Pt 100 from the CH3 input connections IC3 and IC3 It is then not possible to connect a Pt 100 to the CH3 input However input CH3 can still be used for current or voltage measurement or to connect a thermocouple refer to t
181. he FM 355 via direct I O accresses is controlled via the PID_FM FB This multiplex controlling does not function if two instances of the PID_FM FB access the same channel number of a module This results in incorrect parameters in the FM 355 for example setpoint value and manual manipulated value and incorrect displays of the PID_FM FB at its output parameters The output parameter RET_VALU contains the feedback value RET_VAL of the SFCs RD_REC and WR_REC With the blocks for PROFINET operation the RET_VAL includes the 2nd and 3rd bytes of the STATUS parameter of the SFB RDREC and WRREC RET_VAL can be evaluated if the parameters READ_PAR and LOAD_PAR are not reset The values of RET_VALU are described in the reference manual 2 An I O access error can occur when the PID_FM FB is called if the FM 355 is not plugged or is not supplied with voltage In this case the CPU changes to STOP mode if no OB 122 is loaded in the CPU Instance DB of the PID_FM FB Page 11 1 FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Implementing the FM 355 in the User Program 7 2 3 Procedure See also 7 2 The function block PID_FM Changing Controller Parameters Using the PID_FM FB Controller parameters such as controller gain integration coefficient are all the I O parameters that lie after the cont_par parameter in the instance DB of the function block Controller parameters are first configured
182. he fixing screws on the module Swing the module out of the mounting rail and unhook it N OO FBP ON Install the new module if applicable Further Information Manual 1 contains further notes on installing and removing modules FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 4 3 Installing and Removing the FM 355 4 2 Installing and Removing the FM 355 FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Wiring the FM 355 5 1 Terminal assignment of the front connectors FM 355 C front connectors The digital inputs the analog inputs and outputs and the power supply of the module are connected via the two 20 pin front connectors of the FM 355 C The following figure shows the front of the module a front connector and the inside of the front panels with the pin assignments a FM 355C PID Control fo 0 Backup Q1 4 4 E L o m fe 1 2 2 Al 27 b g eji 2 Q3 gt a e e 3 Qa 4 td 4 fo le 4 Qs TO A 5 e fo 5 Qe 6 A e o le 6 Qr7 2 fel fe 7 Qs BoE n P o o 8 Qs Wy O a g o 10 10 w o Oo 11 14 11 CH1 _ iz 12 b 2 2 102 0 500 o fo 13 13 Fm 13 CH2 fel aI 1 4 1 14 5007 oO oO 15 15 A 15 CH3 g o 1 s 16 c
183. he following figure shows a blending control for three components The total quantity controller is implemented as a three component controller pulse controller The total quantity PV is calculated via its inputs Actual value A Actual value B and Actual value C The secondary controllers are configured as ratio blending controllers The manipulated variable of the master controller is connected via the Actual value D input The factor FAC1 to FAC3 is specified via the setpoint value input of the controller The manipulated variable LMN of the total quantity controller is specified in the range of values 0 to 100 The secondary controller converts this variable at the Actual value input D into the value range of the Actual value A the value range of the Actual value A consists of the Upper and Lower normalization values of the selected analog input If the manipulated variable of a secondary controller enters the limiting function or if the setpoint value increase of a secondary controller is limited by the ramp function in the setpoint value branch the l action component of the master controller is blocked direction specifically until the cause for the limitation has been eliminated in the secondary controller FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 3 11 How Does the FM 355 Control 3 4 Controller 3 12 Total quantity Main components SP1 or SP LMN higher Con
184. he next figure Resolution The integration time results from the selected resolution of the measured value The higher the resolution precision of the measured value the longer is the integration time for an analog input channel FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 9 3 Properties of Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs 9 2 Properties of the Analog Inputs Connection diagram The following figure shows the connection diagram of the analog inputs of the FM 355 Voltage measurement Resistance FaUItCEDS bed Thermocouple elements ee ied m Current measurement FM 355 S PID Control 5l SF 1 2 Gal p IC1 3 IC1 q T M1 M1 gt CH1 CH1 s0 M1 Mi 6 Ict IC2 7 7 IC2 Ic CH2 BF M2 i o M2 gt q 9 gt M2 M2 wo COMP COMP Na 11 e COMP COMP 1 2 Iet IC3 d 3 A all z IC3 Ic 4 S M3 M3 CH3 CH3 EO gt M3 M3 16 Ic _ A IC4 1 A IC4 D d Ic CH4 To S M4 CH4 o M4 gt ees 4 vi Me J o 20 MANA MANA MANA 355 1VH00 0AE0 1 with compensation of the referenc
185. hm is activated at the input Switch fuzzy identification on 85 3 SPINT_EN 2 BOOL Operator input external 0 internal 1 FALSE The input operating input external 0 internal 1 determines the input that is transferred as a set value to the module SPINT_EN TRUE SP_INT is transferred SPINT_EN FALSE SP_RE is transferred FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 11 41 Assignment of the Instance DBs 11 8 Assignment of the DBs for Operator Control and Monitoring via OP at the input D element input 0 Error signal Negative deviation 1 to 4 Analog input 1 to 4 17 Negative actual process value Addr Parameter Data Comment Permitted range of Default Explanation In the type English values setting parameter assign ment screen form 85 4 P_SEL BOOL P action on TRUE The PID algorithm PID 1 allows individual PID Controller actions to be switched on and off The proportional action is activated when the Activate P action component input is set 85 5 PFDB_SEL BOOL P action in FALSE In the PID algorithm PID 1 feedback path the P and D actions Controller can be included in the feedback path The proportional action is in the feedback path when the P action component in the feedback input is set 86 0 D_EL_SEL INT D element input for 0 to 4 or 17
186. iants FM 355 Version Voltage sensor Connecting 10 1 W Wire breakage 12 6 Wire end ferrule 5 8 Wiring Front connectors with the parameterization What you should note Index 7 Index FM 355 closed loop control module Index 8 Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03
187. iants e Continuous action controller with analog outputs e S controller step and pulse controllers with digital outputs Order Numbers Product Scope of delivery Order Number FM 355 C e FM 355 C module version gt 6 continuous 6ES7355 0VH10 0AE0 controller e CD with configuration package manual and Getting Started FM 355 S e FM 355 S module version gt 6 step and pulse 6ES7355 1VH10 0AE0O controller e CD with configuration package manual and Getting Started FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 1 1 Product Overview 1 2 Functionality of the FM 355 1 2 Functionality of the FM 355 Introduction The FM 355 function module is a controller module for use in the S7 300 Automation systems Control Method Two different control methods are implemented in the FM 355 Support in optimizing the control system is available for both control methods Control method Optimization by Temperature controller fuzzy controller The module self tuning controller PID controller Parameter assignment interface or PID Self Tuner Control Structures You can use the FM 355 for the following control structures Operating modes Set value control Follower control 3 component control Cascade control Ratio control Mix control Split range control The FM 355 can operate in the following modes 1 2 Automatic
188. iew 7 4 FM 355 Hardware Diagnostics and Status LED s The FM 355 has ten LEDs that can be used both for diagnostics and for indicating the status of the FM 355 and its digital inputs The following table lists the LEDs with their labeling color and function Table 1 2 Diagnostics and Status LED s Labeling Color Function SF red Group error Backup Yellow Display of the backup mode 11 Green Status of Digital Input 11 12 Green Status of Digital Input 12 13 Green Status of Digital Input I3 14 Green Status of Digital Input 14 I5 Green Status of Digital Input 15 l6 Green Status of Digital Input I6 I7 Green Status of Digital Input I7 18 Green Status of Digital Input 18 The LEDs next to the binary outputs of the FM 355 S are not controlled and do not have any meaning FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 1 7 Product Overview 7 5 FM 355 Software 1 5 FM 355 Software Software Package of the FM 355 In order to integrate the FM 355 in the S7 300 you require a software package with Parameter configuration interface Software for the CPU function blocks Parameter Configuration Interface The FM 355 is adapted to the task in hand via parameters These parameters are stored in the system data and are transferred in the CPU STOP state from the programming device PC to the CPU and to the FM 355 In addition the
189. imate the controlled system to the properties of the real process by selecting the parameters correspondingly The configuration tool can be used to find a set of suitable controller characteristics through identification of the model system FM 355 closed loop control module 13 6 Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Examples 13 2 Application example for the FM 355 C Functions of the Example Program The example Example 355 C essentially comprises the two function blocks PID_FM FB 31 and PROC_C FB 100 PID_FM embodies the controller while PROC_C simulates a controlled system with a third order regulation refer to the figure below DISV Controlled system Continuous controller Controller Figure 13 5 Example Example 355 C control circuit The PROC_C function block simulates a series connection that consists of three first order time delays refer to the following figure The disturbance variable DISV is always added to the output signal of the actuator so that system disturbances can be fed forward manually at this point The static system gain can be determined by means of the GAIN factor DISV 1 6 ELE GAIN OUTV o i TM_LAG1 TM_LAG2 TM_LAG3 Figure 13 6 Structure and parameters of the controlled system block PROC_C Block structure Example 2 consists of the function APP_2 that encompasses the blocks for the controller
190. ing manipulated value LMN_OP and the corresponding switches SP_OP_ON and LMNOP_ON has been changed through OP control the PID_FM FB takes over these values from the FM after the CPU start up if the READ_VAR TRUE parameter is set Operator Control and Monitoring of the FM 355 with the OP via MPI You can establish a maximum of three connections from the FM 355 to OPs via MPI Operation of the FM 355 using the OP is only possible in the STOP state of the CPU or ata CPU failure Monitoring of the FM 355 with the OP is always possible FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 3 33 How Does the FM 355 Control 3 6 Functional mechanisms and data storage in the FM 355 3 34 The variable interface of the FM 355 contains four data blocks with the block numbers 101 to 104 for the controller channels 1 to 4 refer to the following figure Note The contents of Data blocks 101 to 104 do not automatically mirror the parameter value effective on the FM 355 Parameters changed using the OP are only taken over into the FM 355 after the LOAD_PAR or LOAD_OP operating bit has been set If you change a parameter using OP operation without setting the corresponding operating bit the changed parameter value is entered in the data block but the FM 355 continues to operate internally with the unchanged old value of the parameter After the operating bits have been set and the parameters taken
191. ing range Error bit measuring range violation underrange at DS1 Byte 10 to 26 Bit 4 Error bit measuring range violation overrange at DS1 Byte 10 to 26 Bit 5 Error bit wire breakage indication DS1 Byte 10 to 26 Bit 2 0 to 20 mA lt 3 5 mA gt 23 5 mA 4 to 20 mA Error bit 1 at lt 3 6 mA gt 22 8 mA Error bit 1 at lt 3 6 mA Error bit 0 at lt 3 8 mA Error bit 0 at lt 3 8 mA OVto10V lt 1 175 V gt 11 75 V Pt 100 lt 30 82 mV gt 650 46 mV 200 to 850 C 328 to 1562 F Pt 100 lt 30 82 mV gt 499 06 mV 200 to 556 C 328 to 1032 F Pt 100 lt 30 82 mV gt 254 12 mV 200 to 130 C 328 to 264 F Thermocouple Type B lt 0 mV gt 13 81 mV Thermocouple Type J lt 8 1 mV gt 69 54 mV Thermocouple Type K lt 6 45 mV gt 54 88 mV Thermocouple Type R lt 0 23 mV gt 21 11 mV Thermocouple Type S lt 0 24 mV gt 18 7 mV Free thermocouple lt Lower input value of the polyline lt Upper input value of the polyline 12 6 FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Examples 1 3 13 1 Application example for the FM 355 S Introduction The FM_PIDEx project contains the example SIMATIC 300 Station S that shows you the operation of the controller module S at a system simulated in the CPU This means that you
192. int SP_RE of the function block 1 to 4 Analog input value 1 to 4 17 to 20 Manipulated variable LMN of controllers 1 to 4 INT Selection of the main control variable 50 process value A for the controller 0 Process value A 0 0 1 to 4 Analog input value 1 to 4 FM 355 closed loop control module A 4 Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 FB 29 and FB 30 A 1 The FB 29 PID_PAR function block Data type INT Description Selection of the auxiliary control variable process value B for the controller 0 Process value B 0 0 1 to 4 Analog input value 1 to 4 Index number 51 INT Selection of the auxiliary control variable process value C for the controller 0 Process value C 0 0 1 to 4 Analog input value 1 to 4 52 INT Selection of the auxiliary control variable process value C for the controller 0 Process value D 0 0 1 to 4 Analog input value 1 to 4 17 to 20 Manipulated variable LMN of controllers 1 to 4 53 INT Selection of the DISV disturbance variable for the controller 0 Disturbance variable 0 0 1 to 4 Analog input value 1 to 4 54 INT INT Selection of the position tracking TRACK_PER for the controller 0 Position adjustment 0 0 1 to 4 Analog input value 1 to 4 Selection of the position tracking LMNR_PER for the controller 0 Position adjustment 0 0 1 to 4 Analog input value 1 to 4 55 56 INT Selection of
193. it requires the same conversion time as the analog input with the highest conversion time e The sampling time of a controller is the sum of the conversion times of the used analog inputs plus the conversion time of the reference junction input Startup Behavior During the startup the FM 355 initially takes over the current parameters from its EEPROM and starts to control with these parameters These are overwritten by the CPU with parameters from the system data as soon as the P bus connection between the CPU and the FM 355 is established If the system data do not contain any parameters for the controller the module continues to control with the parameters stored in the EEPROM A change to default parameters is unknown to the FM 355 The following configurable options are available for the manipulated value for a restart after a power failure e The controller begins with the safety manipulated value This setting remains effective until it is reversed by the user program via the function block e The controller goes into closed loop control operation The following configurable options are available for the setpoint value for a restart after a power failure e The last valid setpoint value remains effective e Achangeover to the safety setpoint value take place This changeover is only effective if the setpoint value is specified by the user program via the function block Otherwise the setpoint value is specified either by an ana
194. ith a safety alert symbol indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken Caution without a safety alert symbol indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken Notice indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding information is not taken into account If more than one degree of danger is present the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage Qualified Personnel The device system may only be set up and used in conjunction with this documentation Commissioning and operation of a device system may only be performed by qualified personnel Within the context of the safety notes in this documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission ground and label devices systems and circuits in accordance with established safety practices and standards Prescribed Usage Note the following AN Warning This device may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the technical description and only in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which have been approved or recommended by Siemens Correct reliable operation of the product requires proper transport storage positioning and assembly as well as careful
195. ith the block for PROFINET Mode the RET_VAL includes the 2nd and 3rd bytes from the STATUS parameter of the SFB 52 53 RET_VALU can be evaluated if an error is reported via the QMOD_F see reference manual 2 FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 11 21 Assignment of the Instance DBs 11 2 Instance DB of the FUZ_355 FB Addr Parameter Data Comment Permitted range of Default Explanation In the type English values setting parameter assign ment screen form 4 0 PARAFFUZ WORD Parameter fault 0 On the PARAFFUZ display parameter a parameterization error created by the FB FUZ_355 is displayed as follows High byte of PARAFFUZ 01 A parameter configuration error exists High byte of PARAFFUZ 00 A parameter configuration error does not exist The low byte contains the offset of the parameter that caused the parameter configuration error calculated from the static variable FUZ_PAR 1 6 0 READ_PAR BOOL Read fuzzy FALSE If the READ_PAR parameters parameter is set the fuzzy parameters are read out of the module and stored in the static variables of the instance DB 6 1 LOAD_PAR BOOL _ Write fuzzy FALSE If the LOAD _PAR parameters parameter is set the fuzzy parameters are read out of the static variables of the instance DB module and transferred to the module
196. k diagram FM 355 C FM 355 S C Cables Cross section Selecting 5 8 Cascade control 3 14 Example 13 11 CE Marking iv Certification iv CH_DIAG Displayed values Purpose CH_DIAG FB Displayed values Instance DB 1 28 Purpose 0 Changeover Manual automatic Changing controller parameters Index 1 Index Via the OP Via the PID_FM FB 7 5 Channel number Entering in DB 7 2 7 20 Channels Number Characteristic values for temperature controlled system CJ_T_PAR Purpose CJ_T_PAR FB Instance DB Purpose 7 29 Coil circuiting 5 7 Commissioning Creating an instance DB 8 3 HW installation and wiring 8 1 Inserting FM 355 into re 8 2 Parameter configuration Saving the project Setting up a new project Compensation Configured External of the reference junction temperature Reference junction temperature Configuring 4 1 Hardware 6 Connecting a loads actuators to analog output 13 Four wire measuring transducer Measuring transducers at analog input Two wire measuring transducer Voltage sensor 10 1 Connecting to digital output Loads Actuators Connection assignment 1 6 Connector assignment FM 355 C 5 2 FM 355 S 5 4 Continuous action controller Control algorithm Block diagram 3 PID action controller Control method Fuzzy controller PID controller Control parameters 11 20 Control response 2 7 Selection Control structures
197. l inputs can be assigned to each controller channel Each controller channel can be interconnected with the conditioned analog values the digital inputs or also the output of another controller channel Each analog output can be interconnected with a controller output or with an analog value conditioning The interconnection possibility with an analog value conditioning can for example be used to convert a non linear temperature value into a linear output signal FM 355 closed loop control module 3 2 Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 How Does the FM 355 Control 3 1 Basic Structure of the FM 355 Block Diagram of the FM 355 S The following figure shows the block diagram of the FM 355 S step controller and the interconnection possibilities under the individual function blocks FM 355 S inputs Controller FM 355 S outputs Analog input Analog value 1 i preparation Gl Controller gia na Ry i channels i i digital output 1 2 Analog input Analog value 4 gt preparation Controtter digital output channels gt 3 2 digital output t 4 Reference junction for Controller Aigitaloutput analog inputs 1 chagnels ai 3 digital output 6 Controller digital output Digital input channels gt 7 1 digital output 8 Digital input 8 The inputs and outputs can
198. le assigned for controller monitoring the process variable or the negative deviation The Lower limit alarm specifies the lowest limit 24 0 HYS REAL Hysteresis gt 0 0 1 0 To prevent flickering Alarm 1 physical variable of the monitoring controller displays a hysteresis can be configured at the hysteresis input 28 0 DEADB_W REAL Dead band width gt 0 0 0 0 A dead band is Dead 1 physical variable applied to the band negative deviation controller The Dead band width input determines the size of the dead band 32 0 GAIN REAL Proportional gain Complete range of 1 0 The input PID 1 values proportional gain Controller dimensionless indicates the controller gain 36 0 TI REAL Reset time s 0 0 or gt 0 5 3000 0 The integration time PID 1 input determines the Controller time response of the integrator If TI 0 the integrator is deactivated FM 355 closed loop control module 11 36 Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Assignment of the Instance DBs 11 8 Assignment of the DBs for Operator Control and Monitoring via OP Addr Parameter Data Comment Permitted range of Default Explanation In the type English values setting parameter assign ment screen form 40 0 TD REAL Derivative time s 0 0 or gt 1 0 0 0 The derivative time PID 1 input determines the Controller time response of the derivative unit If TD 0 the de
199. log position feedback the position feedback is displayed In the case of step controllers without analog position feedback the simulated position feedback is displayed 118 0 LMN_B REAL Manipulated value B 100 0 100 0 0 0 Manipulated value B of of split range the split range function function is displayed at the output Manipulated value B of the split range function at a continuous action controller 122 0 QH_ALM BOOL High limit alarm FALSE The actual value or the reached controlled variable is monitored for four limits Exceeding of the limit H_ALM is signaled at the Upper limit alarm triggered output 122 1 QH_WRN BOOL High limit warning FALSE The actual value or the reached controlled variable is monitored for four limits Exceeding of the limit H_WRN is signaled at the Upper limit warning triggered output FM 355 closed loop control module 11 44 Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Assignment of the Instance DBs 11 8 Assignment of the DBs for Operator Control and Monitoring via OP Addr 122 2 Parameter QL_WRN Data type BOOL Comment English Lower limit warning reached Permitted range of values Default setting FALSE Explanation The actual value or the controlled variable is monitored for four limits Exceeding of the limit H_WRN is signaled at the Lower limit warning trigger
200. log input or by or controller output depending on the parameter configuration Startup Behavior in an S7 300 and Own Power Supply of the FM 355 If the FM 355 in an S7 300 system has its own 24 V supply voltage that is independent of the CPU the communication connection of the CPU to the FM 355 is interrupted after a failure and return of the 24 V supply voltage of the FM 355 This is indicated as follows e The RET_VALU output parameter has an error value in the PID_FM FB e The CPU does not change to the RUN state due to the Parameter configuration error error cause FM 355 closed loop control module 3 38 Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 How Does the FM 355 Control 3 7 Characteristics of the FM 355 In order to restore the communication between the CPU and the FM 355 proceed as follows for the CPUs and devices listed below CPU Device Order No Procedure 313 6ES7 313 1AD00 0ABO 314 6ES7 314 1AE00 0ABO 6ES7 314 1AE01 0ABO 314 IFM 6ES7 314 5AE00 0ABO 315 6ES7 315 1AF00 0ABO 315 2 DP 6ES7 315 2AF00 0ABO a oE O CRIAT ORAN Turn the power supply for the CPU off C7 623 6ES7 623 1AE00 0AE3 and on again 6ES7 623 1CE00 0AE3 C7 624 6ES7 624 1AE00 0AE3 6ES7 624 1CE00 0AE3 C7 626 6ES7 626 1AG00 0AE3 6ES7 626 2AG00 0AE3 6ES7 626 1CG00 0AE3 6ES7 626 2CG00 0AE3 Proceed as follows at the CPUs listed below CPU Order No Procedure 313 6E
201. m sssssessssneseerneessnnssennannsnnunennnennnnnaeennannannaaedae 2 1 2 2 Controller Types Two Step Three Step Controllers cccceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeeaeeseeneeeeneaas 2 3 Control Response at Different Feedback Structures ccccceseesecceeeeeeeeceeeaeceseeseeeesaeeeeetedes 2 7 2 4 Choosing the controller structure with a given Control section ce eeeeeeeeteeeeeenteeeeeeneeeeeaes 2 14 2 5 Setting the Controller Characteristic Values Optimization ee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeenteeeeeeneeeeeaes 2 16 2 6 Determining the System Parameters for Two Three Step Controllers c ccceceeeees 2 18 2 7 Determining the System Parameters for Pure Cooling Controllers ccceeeseeeeesteeeeeenees 2 21 2 8 Establishing parameters by ExperiMent cc cceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeseneeeeseneeeeeseneeeeseenaeees 2 23 3 How Does the FM 355 Comtrol ccssssscssscessssssssseeesttesssessessssssssssceeeecesessseeceeceeeseeseeeussesennensenstetieee 3 1 3 1 Basic Structure of the FM 355 v escssssssscsssssssssssseeesseseesssvesnsseeceeseessmenssseeeeecesnnenseeeeeeeteeenese 3 4 3 2 Basic Parame O Sosine a aeatave dearest sen adler reenanene aria abees des 3 4 3 3 FM S55 IN PUIS cccides desaccencccapssaccapann a a aa a aaa A a a Aaa 3 3 1 Analog INP eaa e E ETENEE EE E qeinbewnebneass 3 3 2 DigtalinpulS e sinse E ARA EE A S EA E 3 4 Controle nccrne E R EEEE E E E leet 3 8 3 5 Outpu
202. ments of diagnostics record DSO Byte Bit Meaning Note Event No 0 0 Module malfunction Is set at every diagnostics event 8 x 00 1 Internal fault Is set at all internal faults 8 x 01 e Watchdog time out e EEPROM contents invalid Module starts up without controlling and waits for renewed parameter configuration by the CPU e EPROM error e ADC DAC fault e Analog input hardware fault 2 External error Is set at all external errors 8 x 02 e Missing external auxiliary supply e Parameter configuration faulty e Analog input wire breakage only range 4 to 20 mA e Analog input measuring range violation underrange e Analog input measuring range violation overrange e Analog output wire breakage e Analog output short circuit FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 12 3 Faults and Diagnostics 12 2 Triggering diagnostic interrupts Byte Bit Meaning Note Event No Fault in a channel See DS1 from byte 7 for further breakdown 8 x 03 4 Missing external 24 V power supply of the FM 355 failed 8 x 04 auxiliary supply 6 EEPROM contents Failure of the supply voltage during a writing 8 x 03 invalid process to the EEPROM The module starts up with default parameters 7 Parameter The module cannot use a parameter Reason 8 x 07 configuration faulty Parameter unknown or impermissible combination of paramet
203. metal alloys soldered or welded together at their ends The different thermocouple types for example B J or K are derived from diverse material compositions The measuring principle of all thermocouples is the same irrespective of their type Figure 10 3 Thermocouple structure Measuring point Thermocouple with plus and minus thermo shanks Connection point Equalizing lead Reference junction Supply line Trimming resistor VOOOOOO Measuring point of the thermoelectric voltage FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 10 5 Connecting Measuring Transducers and Loads Actuators 10 2 Use of Thermocouples Operating Principle of Thermocouples Any temperature difference between the measuring point and the free ends of the thermocouple induces a thermoelectric voltage which is tapped at the terminating ends The thermoelectric voltage induced on the thermocouple is a function of the temperature difference between the measuring point and the free ends and is also determined by the material factor Thermocouples always sense a temperature difference It is therefore essential to hold the free ends at the known temperature of a reference junction in order to be able to determine the temperature at the measuring junction If this is not possible the reference junction temperature has to be detected and equalized via the additional input with a Pt 100 Extension to a R
204. meter assign ment screen form 10 0 11 34 BUSY BOOL BUSY value of SFC 59 SFB 53 FALSE If BUSY TRUE the parameters have not yet been transferred from the module at distributed I Os The call of the PID_PAR FB should then be repeated in the next cycle FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Assignment of the Instance DBs 11 8 Assignment of the DBs for Operator Control and Monitoring via OP 11 8 Assignment of the DBs for Operator Control and Monitoring via OP Introduction The variable interface of the FM 355 contains four data blocks with the block numbers 101 to 104 for the controller channels 1 to 4 that are used for operator control and monitoring of the FM 355 via an OP The following tables list the parameters of these instance DBs e Input parameters e Output parameters e In Out parameters Input Parameters Table 11 16 Input parameters of the DBs for operator control and monitoring Addr Parameter Data Comment Permitted range of Default Explanation In the type English values setting parameter assign ment screen form 0 0 SP_HLM REAL Setpoint high limit gt SP_LLM 100 0 The setpoint is Limiting 1 physical variable always limited by an setpoint upper and lower limit controller The Setpoint high limit input specifies the upper limit 4 0 SP_LLM REAL Setpoint low limit lt SP
205. module address that resulted from the configuration with STEP 7 is given at this input NT Channel Number 1 to 4 1 The number of the controller channel to which the instance DB refers is configured at the Channel number input 4 0 PHASE INT Phase of PID self Is not configured 0 The PHASE parameter tuner can be interconnected with the PHASE output parameter of a PID self tuner program for self tuning of controller parameters The phase state of the PID self tuner can then be displayed in clear text in the loop monitor This parameter is not relevant for the OP 2 0 CHANNEL FM 355 closed loop control module 11 2 Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Assignment of the Instance DBs Output Parameters Table 11 2 Output parameters of the instance DB for the PID_FM FB 11 1 Instance DB of the PID_FM FB Addr 6 0 Parameter RET_VALU Data type INT Comment English Return value SFC 58 59 SFB 52 53 Permitted range of values Default setting Explanation RET_VALU includes the return value RET_VAL of the SFC 58 59 With the block for PROFINET Mode the RET_VAL includes the 2nd and 3rd bytes from the STATUS parameter of the SFB 52 53 RET_VALU can be evaluated if an error is reported via the QMOD_F see reference manual 2 In the parameter assign ment screen form 8 0 out_par WORD Begin of output
206. n Autoclaves 0 5 to 0 7 min 10 to 20 min High pressure autoclaves 12 to 15 min 200 to 300 min Injection molding machines 0 5 to 3 min 3 to 30 min 5 to 20 K min Extruders 1 to 6 min 5 to 60 min Packaging machines 0 5 to 4 min 3 to 40 min 2 to 35 K min FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 2 3 Information for the controller adjustment 2 2 Controller Types Two Step Three Step Controllers 2 2 Controller Types Two Step Three Step Controllers Two Step Controllers Without Feedback 2 4 Two step controllers have the state ON and OFF as the switching function This corresponds to 100 or 0 output Through this behavior a sustained oscillation of Controlled variable x occurs around Setpoint value w The amplitude and the oscillation duration increases with the ratio of the Delay time Tu to the Recovery time Tg of the controlled system These controllers are used mainly for simple temperature control systems such as electrically directly heated furnaces or as limit value signaling units A O Yn Figure 2 2 Characteristic curve of a two step controller ON OFF Yh Position range w Reference value FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Information for the controller adjustment 2 2 Controller Types Two Step Three Step Controllers A x lt
207. n on If the bit is set the value LMN_OP is used as the manipulated value In para meter configu ration mask 56 3 LMNTRKON BOOL Match LMN from analog input FALSE If the input Track LMN via analog input is set the manipulated value is tracked to an analog input this does not apply to step action controllers without analog position feedback 56 4 56 5 LMN_REON LMNRHSRE BOOL BOOL External manipulated value on High limit signal of repeated manipulated value FALSE FALSE If the input Switch external manipulated value on is set the external manipulated value LMN_RE is used as the manipulated value The signal Manipulated valve on high stop is switched on the high stop signal of the position feedback input LMNRHSRE TRUE means The control valve is at its upper limit For step controllers only FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 11 13 Assignment of the Instance DBs 11 1 Instance DB of the PID_FM FB Addr 56 6 Parameter LMNRLSRE Data type BOOL Comment English Low limit signal of repeated manipulated value Permitted range of values Default setting FALSE Explanation The signal Manipulated valve on low stop is switched on the low stop signal of the position feedback input LMNRLSRE TRUE means The control valv
208. nal down operation FALSE If LMNSOPON is set the value at the input Manipulated value signal down operation as the manipulated value signal For step controllers only 11 40 FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Assignment of the Instance DBs 11 8 Assignment of the DBs for Operator Control and Monitoring via OP Addr 85 0 85 1 Parameter MONERSEL 1 LMNRS_ON 2 Data type BOOL BOOL Comment English Monitoring Process variable 0 Error signal 1 Simulation of the repeated manipulated value on Permitted range of values Default setting FALSE FALSE Explanation The controller possesses a limit value detector that can be applied either for the actual value or for the error signal If the input Monitoring actual value 0 control deviation 1 is set the control deviation will be monitored If no position feedback is available this can be simulated The function is switched on on the input simulation of the position feedback on CAUTION Over time the simulation deviates increasingly from the true position feedback Only in the case of step controllers without analog position feedback In the parameter assign ment screen form Alarm controller 85 2 FUZID_ON 2 BOOL Fuzzy identification on FALSE The identification of the fuzzy algorit
209. nd eliminate errors firmware updates can be downloaded to the operating system memory of the FM 355 This functionality is described in the online help of the parameter configuration interface FM 355 closed loop control module 3 40 Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 How Does the FM 355 Control 3 8 Parameter optimization with temperature controllers 3 8 Parameter optimization with temperature controllers Demands on the process in the case of temperature controllers The process should fulfill the following requirements in order to achieve optimal control using the temperature controller At bath heatings the liquid to be heated has to be mixed thoroughly In case of bath in bath control systems both liquids have to be mixed thoroughly At the same time good heat transitions between all the heat transferring media have to be ensured In the case of materials with poor heat transferring properties large transfer surfaces should ensure good heat transportation In case of room temperature control systems thorough mixing for example with fans has to be ensured The controlling system gain may not exceed the factor of 3 The delay time may not exceed 3 of the recovery time The temperature to be controlled should change by a maximum of 1 o of the specified maximum temperature at the maximum manipulated value output within the sampling time of the controller Classification of the Controlled Systems A c
210. necting thermocouples with external compensation Grounding of thermocouples is shown in the figures in the section Connecting Measuring Transducers to Analog Inputs FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Connecting Measuring Transducers and Loads Actuators 10 2 Use of Thermocouples Thermocouples with Configured Compensation of the Reference Junction The configured temperature compensation can be used when thermocouples are connected directly or via equalizing lines to the inputs of the module Supply L FM 355 conductor Moo copper o e M lt amet M e Thermo i e Process couple e M Logic ing in the elements lt M e FM 355 Compensat i i ing cable i IC RDC same l i material as i o COME for thermo couple i elements i COMP 1 1 e gt e i l MANA Reference junction Compensation specified by the parameter assignment interface Figure 10 5 Block diagram for connecting thermocouples with configured compensation Grounding of thermocouples is shown in the figures in the section Connecting Measuring Transducers to Analog Inputs FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 10 9 Connecting Measuring Transducers and Loads Actuators 10 3 Connecting Voltage Sensors Current Sensors and Resi
211. ng output becomes less than 100 This behavior can be used for example to deactivate the identification via the user program After the identification phase the controller continues to operate with the determined parameters A renewed identification is carried out at every further setpoint value step change gt 12 unless the identification has been deactivated again with FUZID_ON FALSE If the setpoint value step change is not adjusted and if the heating output remains permanently at zero the identification has been terminated unsuccessfully meaning that the controller cannot control the connected controlled system Preconditions for the Identification You have to ensure as far as possible that the controlled system has settled no heating up or cooling down process or is changing slowly and monotonously before the identification is carried out The criterion can be that the temperature change is to approach a straight during a period of one minute At faster processes this requirement is particularly relevant Since the manipulated variable zero is output for approx one minute by the controller at the beginning of identification the temperature to be controlled has to lie near the ambient temperature How To Start Identification In order to start identification you first have to switch the controller to the optimization mode This is done by setting the FUZID_ON bit in the instance DB of the PID_FM FB either by the user program o
212. nipulated variable follow up gt e Position feedback input Figure 7 12 Controller output of the step controller step controller operating mode with position feedback QLMNRHS QLMNRLS external manipulated variable NOLO QLMNUP yael L QLMNDN effective Switch Switching Pulse neal external safety shaper ate a manipu manipulated variable lated value variable Figure 7 143 Controller output of the step controller step controller operating mode without position feedback See also Instance DB of the PID_FM FB Page 11 1 FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 7 13 Implementing the FM 355 in the User Program 7 3 The FUZ_355 function block 7 3 Use The FUZ_355 function block The FUZ_355 FB is used for the temperature controller of the FM 355 fuzzy controller This FB can be used to read and write the parameters of all the temperature controllers of the FM 355 This function is suitable for the following applications e Transfer of the controller parameters determined through identification to the FM 355 after module replacement e Adapting the FM 355 to different controlled systems Note You may not change the parameters determined through identification by the FM 355 since they have been optimized for the process The FUZ_355 FB does not require an initialization run
213. nput parameters of the instance DB for the PID_PAR FB cccceseeeseeeeeeeeeeteseneeeeees 11 31 Output parameters of the instance DB for the PID_PAR FB ccceceeeeeeseneeeeeteeeteenees 11 32 Input parameters of the instance DB for the CU_T_PAR FB ccccccsceeceeeeeeeeeesecteeeeees 1 33 Output parameters of the instance DB for the CJU_T_PAR FB cccceeseseeeeeeeeteeeeeenees 1 34 Input parameters of the DBs for operator control and MOnitOring ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeetteeeeees 1 35 Output parameters of the DBs for operator control and monitoring cceceeeeeeeeeeeereeeees 1 43 I O parameters of the DBs for operator control ANd MONItOLING eee ee eeteeeeeeteeeeeeteeeeeees 1 51 Assignments of diagnostics record DSO ee eececceeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeaeeeeetaeeeetnaeeeeeeieeeeenaeee aa Assignment of Bytes 4 to 12 of the diagnostics record DS eeeeeeeeeeeeeenteeeeeetaeeeeenas 12 4 Blocks Of Example Trioen n a vaaveanaatelenastelensadarcdaetendilanesanieddte ts 13 3 Blocks of EXaMple 2 ic siccseetcagcdetdaniadenadicdacte chante vended gubesnenvaatecevemnacchdnianesseanclsamexnaredetianddlans 13 7 List of the REAL and INT parameters that can be changed with the PID_PAR FB A 3 Input parameters of the instance DB for the FB 29 PID_PAR c eceeeeeeeeeestcteeeeees A 7 FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 0
214. ns The process values for example actual value manipulated value can also be read from the PID_FM FB via direct I O accesses This transfer requires less run time but entails the functional limitations listed below If the READ_VAR TRUE parameter is set then the process values are read from the FM 355 via the SFC RD_REC SFB RDREC However this requires more run time Functional limitations if READ_VAR is not set e The SP setpoint from the FM ER negative deviation DISV disturbance variable LMN_A and LMN_B variables are not updated e The data are multiplexed The actual value and manipulated value as well as the binary displays are not up to date until after the block has been called four times e Ifthe setpoint and manual manipulated value were operated via the continuous action controller these operating values are not updated read from the FM during the start up of the FB CPU Further information about using instance DBs is available in this documentation in the sections Including the FM 355 in the User Program and Assignment of DBs Parameter assignment Page 6 2 Summary Page 7 1 Instance DB ofthe PID_FM FB Page 11 1 Assignment ofthe DBs for Operator Control and Monitoring via OF Page 1 35 Operator Control and Monitoring of the FM 355 via the PID_FM FB Operator control and monitoring of the FM 355 is possible via the PID_FM FB If one of the following parameters Operating setpoint SP_OP Operat
215. nt safety set point a _ signal Interrupt Alarm Effective process z value oN La a D input ye Se Figure 3 5 Disturbance variable Negative Deviation Generation at Fixed Setpoint or Cascade Controller The manipulated value of a master controller is selected at the setpoint value at the cascade controller In the example from the figure below the manipulated value of Controller 1 is selected as the setpoint value at Controller 2 If a secondary controller that is configured as a fixed setpoint controller is switched to manual operation not closed loop control operation the master controller is also switched automatically to manual operation by the module and is held to the last manipulated value As soon as the secondary controller returns to closed loop control operation the master controller also switches over to closed loop control operation If the manipulated variable of a secondary controller enters the limiting function or if the setpoint value increase of a secondary controller is limited by the ramp function in the setpoint value branch the l action component of the master controller is blocked direction specifically until the cause for the limitation has been eliminated in the secondary controller FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 3 9 How Does the FM 355 Control
216. nt at three component controllers and ratio blending controllers as at fixed setpoint or cascade controllers This also applies for the parameters that exist equally at continuous action controllers at controllers with a pulse output as well as at step controllers As a rule the same command buttons also contain the same parameters Therefore in order to obtain a clearly structured overview not all the structure screens are shown and not all the parameters are drawn in all the screens However the parameters of the PID_FM FB are contained in all the figures with the exception of the parameters MOD_ADDR CHANNEL QMOD_F QPARA_F QCH_F QLMNR_ON RET_VALU COM_RST LOAD_PAR READ_VAR LOAD_OP FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 7 7 Implementing the FM 355 in the User Program 7 2 The function block PID_FM At which points do the parameters of the PID_FM FB act The following figures show at which points in the module the parameters of the PID_FM FB act SP_HLM SRLOP SP_LLM p L gt SP_RE aSa set z Switching Ramp Limiting p gt safety set gt Error re Set point point signal SP_OP_ON H_ALM H_WRN L_WRN L_ALM HYS MONERSEL s Process value A Effective process oN value e D input 5
217. nual If the FM 355 is used in distributed I Os it may take a few call cycles until the parameter has been transferred to the FM 355 The parameter BUSY has the value TRUE until the transfer has been completed You should therefore repeatedly call the CJ_T_PAR FB when changing parameters until BUSY FALSE FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 7 29 Implementing the FM 355 in the User Program 7 8 The CJ_T_PAR Function Block Call See also 7 30 The FB CJ_T PAR must be called in the same OB as all the other FBs that access the same FM 355 Note The FB 40 CJ_T_PAR from the FM 355 455 PID Control library uses the SFC 54 RD_DPARM You can therefore only use the CJ_T_PAR FB in the CPUs listed in the previous table Note If you are using a new S7 300 CPU with Micro Memory Card then insetad of FB 39 you must use FB 29 and instead of FB 40 you must use FB 30 The descriptions of both file types used are available in the Appendix With a CPU with PROFINET connection you should use the same block from the FM_PID FM 355 PROFINET library Instance DB of the CJU_T_PAR FB Page 11 33 FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Implementing the FM 355 in the User Program 7 9 PROFINET Operation General PROFINET Operation For the PROFINET operation you have to use the blocks from the FM_PID libraries
218. o connect the module with a user program Parameter settings The FM 355 is configured by means of a parameter configuration interface on the programming device refer to the chapter Wiring the FM 355 All the parameter configuration data are stored in a SDB on the programming device Note Only in the STOP state of the CPU can you download the SDB configuration data into the CPU and into the FM 355 via an online connection between the programming device and the CPU This is only possible via the HW Config In doing so the parameter configuration interface must be closed The FM 355 is supplied again with the parameters from the SDB in the CPU during every start up and during the transition of the CPU from STOP to RUN Downloading the Parameters Directly into the FM 355 3 30 It is also possible to download the parameters directly into the FM 355 via the parameter configuration interface so that you do not have to close the parameter configuration interface and set the CPU to the STOP state several times consecutively while the parameter configuration is being tested during commissioning Please note that the parameters loaded by this method are overwritten by the parameters from the SDB of the CPU when the CPU is started up and at a STOP RUN transition of the CPU An FB call can also overwrite the parameters loaded directly from the parameter configuration interface Downloading directly into the FM 355 is therefore only advi
219. o closed loop control operation The safety manipulated value is output as the manipulated value e The changeover to the safety manipulated value is carried alternatively by A binary value from the function block A signal that results from the ORing of a binary value from the function block and a digital input e Reaction at a measuring transducer fault of Actual value A The operating mode of the controller remains unchanged at the setting Closed loop control operation Ifthe setting is Manipulated value Safety manipulated value the system changes over to the safety manipulated value e Reaction at a measuring transducer fault of an analog input The operating mode of the controller remains unchanged at the setting Closed loop control operation Ifthe setting is Manipulated value Safety manipulated value the system changes over to the safety manipulated value Manipulated value limit Upper and lower limit cannot be deactivated Generation of the split range manipulated values e On off only continuous action controllers e Starting and end value of input signal e Starting and end value of output signal Pulse generator only step controller 3 26 e Motor actuating time e Minimum pulse time e Minimum break time FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 How Does the FM 355 Control 3 4 Controller See also
220. o4 __Controtter _ Analog input 20 ms channels 20 Controtter Anes input ms channels __Controtier_ Analog input 100 ms channels __Controtter Analog input 20 ms channels Figure 3 32 Sequence of execution of the FM 355 four inputs used FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 3 35 How Does the FM 355 Control 3 7 Characteristics of the FM 355 Sampling Time 3 36 The combined sampling time of all the controllers of the FM 355 results from the sum of the conversion times of the individual analog inputs The conversion time for the reference junction is added if it is used The conversion time of an analog input depends on the resolution the line frequency and the controller type used Table 3 4 Conversion time of an analog input Resolution Line frequency Controller type Conversion time of an analog input 12 bits 60 Hz No temperature controller 16 2 3 ms 12 bits 50 Hz No temperature controller 20 ms 14 bits 50 or 60 Hz No temperature controller 100 ms 12 or 14 bits 50 or 60 Hz Temperature controller 100 ms If an analog input is not executed the controller channel with the same number is also not executed conversion time 0 No additional conversion times result for the analog outputs The analog output values of the FM 355 are output immediately after the corresponding output value has been calculated
221. of loads actuators to an FM 355 S FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 10 15 Connecting Measuring Transducers and Loads Actuators 10 5 Connecting Loads Actuators to Digital Outputs FM 355 closed loop control module 10 16 Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Assignment of the Instance DBs 1 1 11 1 Instance DB of the PID_FM FB Introduction If you want to communicate with the FM 355 from the user program you require the PID_FM FB In addition you have to create an instance DB that is assigned to the FB for each used controller channel Note All the in out parameters are set to FALSE after an instance DB has been created In order to transfer the parameters from the FM 355 to the instance DB you have to carry out an initialization run at which the in out parameter COM_RST TRUE The following tables list the parameters of this instance DB e Input parameters e Output parameters e In out parameters FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 11 1 Assignment of the Instance DBs 11 1 Instance DB of the PIDLFM FB Input Parameters Table 11 1 Input parameters of the instance DB for the PID_FM FB Add Parameter Data Comment Permitted range of Default Explanation In the Type English values setting parameter assignme nt screen form 0 0 MOD_ADD INT FM 355 455 256 The module address R
222. oint value linkage ratio blending controller 32 REAL Factor for actual value B three component controller 33 REAL Factor for actual value C three component controller 34 REAL Offset for actual value linkage three component controller 35 REAL Factor for disturbance variable linkage 36 REAL Operating point 37 REAL Aggressivity at fuzzy controller 38 REAL Vertices for split range function Start of range input signal A 39 REAL Vertices for split range function End of range input signal A 40 REAL Vertices for split range function Start of range output signal A 41 REAL Vertices for split range function End of range output signal A 42 REAL Vertices for split range function Start of range input signal B 43 REAL Vertices for split range function End of range input signal B 44 REAL Vertices for split range function Start of range output signal B 45 REAL Vertices for split range function End of range output signal B 46 REAL Minimum pulse time 47 REAL Minimum break time 48 INT Selection of the reference variable SP or SP_RE for the controller 49 0 Setpoint value SP_RE from function block 1 to 4 Analog input value 1 to 4 17 to 20 Manipulated variable LMN of Controller 1 to 4 INT Selection of the main controlled variable actual value A for the controller 50 0 Actual value A 0 0 1 to 4 Analog input value 1 to 4 INT Selection of the auxiliary controlled variable actual value B for the controller 51 0 Actual value B 0 0 1 to 4 Analog inp
223. omponent in the feedback input is set PID Controlle r PID Controlle r 11 16 FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Assignment of the Instance DBs 11 1 Instance DB of the PID_FM FB Addr Parameter Data Comment Permitted range of Default Explanation In para type English values setting meter configu ration mask 72 2 MONERSEL_ BOOL Monitoring FALSE The controller possesses Alarm process 2 a limit value detector that controller variable 0 can be applied either for error signal 1 the actual value or for the error signal If the input Monitoring actual value 0 control deviation 1 is set the control deviation will be monitored 74 0 D_EL_SEL INT D element input 0to4or17 0 2 The D element in the PID control for the controller algorithm can be laid to a deviation separate input This is selected at the input D controller element input 0 Error signal Negative deviation 1 to 4 Analog input 1 to 4 17 Negative actual process value D action component in the feedback 76 0 SP_HLM REAL Setpoint high gt SP_LLM 100 0 The setpoint is always Limiting limit physical variable 2 limited to a high and a setpoint low limit The Setpoint controller high limit input specifies the upper limit 80 0 SP_LLM REAL Setpoint low limit lt SP_HLM 0 0 The setpoint is always Limiting
224. on screens The integrated help s description of the parameterization of the module goes into more detail than that of the manual Diagnostics Records DSO and DS1 Page 12 2 FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 6 3 Parameter Configuration of the FM 355 6 3 Parameter assignment FM 355 closed loop control module 6 4 Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Implementing the FM 355 in the User Program 7 1 Summary Overview The following topics contain all the information required to program the FM 355 in the 7 300 Seven STEP 7 blocks are provided in order to implement the FM 355 in a user program These allow simple handling of the desired functions This chapter describes the following blocks PID_FM FB for operator control and monitoring via the CPU as well as online modification of controller parameters FB FUZ_355 for reading and writing the parameters of all temperature controllers of the FM 355 The block enables a fast adaptation of the controller to changes in the control section and a parameterization of the temperature controllers after a module replacement or new identification FORCE355 FB for simulation forcing of the analog and digital input value to support commissioning READ_355 FB for reading out the digital and analog input values to support commissioning A CH_DIAG FB for reading out further channel specific parameters
225. ontrolled system or a process to be controlled is characterized by parameters such as the heat output the heating mass or the heating capacity of the medium to be heated With regard to the fuzzy controller a difference is made between critical and non critical temperature controlled systems as follows The control system becomes increasingly critical The greater the heat output the greater the heating capacity of the heating The lower the heating capacity of the medium to be heated the greater the heat transition resistance the smaller the heat transfer surface FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 3 41 How Does the FM 355 Control 3 8 Parameter optimization with temperature controllers After a manipulated value step change has been applied to the controlled system it reacts with a step response The controlled system can also be classified on the basis of this step response The control system becomes increasingly critical the greater the ratio tu ta is and the greater the controlled system gain is With tu ta lt 1 10 you have a non critical control section refer to the following figure A Step response of a controlled system to a manipulated variable step change ty Delay time tg Balancing time Figure 3 34 Step response of a controlled system to a manipulated value step change Parameter Optimization at a Temperature Controller
226. ontroller 2 12 Control algorithm 3 16 Controller structure 3 16 Dead band Parameterization Polyline Position feedback input Power supply of the encoders 5 5 Program examples 6 1 Properties Controller module Pt100 Connection to FM 355 Pulse generator Q Q1 to Q8 5 6 R Ramp Ratio control Example READ_355 Displayed values 7 18 Purpose READ_355 FB Displayed values 7 Instance DB Purpose Readme file 6 1 Reference input 9 3 Reference junction 1 3 3 6 5 35 10 7 at thermocouple Reference junction input Reference junction temperature 9 3 Compensation Measurement Reference point References Removing FM 355 Removing the FM 355 18 Index 6 Resistance thermometer Connecting Resolution Measured value 9 3 RET_VALU messages A 15 Reversing of the controller action Rules for operation 3 S S7 300 CPU Function blocks Safety manipulated value Safety rules Safety setpoint value 3 13 Sampling time 3 36 3 Scanning time 3 6 Section parameters Empirically establishing Selecting Cables Self tuning controller 1 2 Sequence of execution 3 35 Setpoint At restart 3 38 Conditioning 3 13 Signal selection 3 13 Setting up a project New Shielding contact element Simulation of analog values 7 16 of digital values 7 17 Slots Permissible Smooth changeover Software of the FM 355 Spare parts list C 1 Split range func
227. or example the reference junction temperature is measured with an FM 355 at an extruder control system with more than four heating zones this can be read out via READ_355 FB at the CJ_TEMP parameter and configured at the other FM 355 units via the CJ_T_PAR FB The CJ_T_PAR FB requires an initialization run To this purpose it has to be called once in the start up of the CPU using the COM_RST TRUE parameter The CJ_T_PAR FB is normally called cyclically To this purpose COM_RST should be set to FALSE for run time reasons The COM_RST parameter is an input parameter that is not reset by the CJ_T_PAR FB Creating and Supplying an Instance DB Before you program the module with the user program you have to create an instance DB and supply it with important data 1 Use STEP 7 to create the instance DB as data blocks with an assigned CJ_T_PAR function block 2 Enter the module address in the MOD_ADDR parameter at the instance DB The module address of the FM 355 is specified during the configuration of your hardware Take over the start address from HW Config 3 Enter the channel number of the corresponding controller channel 1 2 3 or 4 in the CHANNEL parameter at the instance DB 4 Save the instance DB The reference junction temperature can be specified at the CU_T parameter The output parameter RET_VALU includes the return value RET_VAL of the SFCs 58 and 59 The values of the RET_VALU are described in the 2 reference ma
228. ou can test the module without a real process Prerequisites Requirements for working with the example program e CPU 314 is inserted at Slot 2 e FM 355 C is plugged into slot 4 e CPU and FM 355 C are supplied with voltage e There is an online connection PG PC to the CPU If you wish to work with a different CPU or FM 355 you must adapt the example under Configure hardware Load the sample program To install the program proceed as follows 1 Download the user program blocks from example 355 C to the CPU 2 In HW Config configure hardware launch the parameterization screen of the FM 355 3 Use the Test gt gt Open instance DB menu item to open the DB 31 You can now work with the loop display the curve recorder and the controller optimization Application of the Example Program The example Example 355 C includes a continuous controller in conjunction with a simulated control section that comprises a 3rd arrangement delay element PT3 The example program can be used to generate a PID controller without any difficulty and to configure and test it in all its properties in an offline interaction with a typical system arrangement The example program makes it easy to understand the functionality and configuration of controllers with an analog output signal such as they are very often used to control systems with actuators that act proportionally It can therefore also be used for familiarizing and training You approx
229. ough parameter Manipulated variable operation If the bit LMNOP_ON is set the value Manipulated value operation is used as the manipulated value In para meter configu ration mask 66 0 LMNRSVAL REAL Start value of the repeated manipulated value in simulation 100 0 100 0 0 0 The configuration tool controller optimization has access to the input Start value of the simulated position feedback The start value of the simulation is entered at the parameter Only in the case of step controllers without analog position feedback 70 0 cont_par WOR Begin of control parameters W 16 3130 W 16 3 1302 The cont_par parameter may not be overwritten by the user It characterizes the start of the controller parameter that is read from the FM and stored in the instance DB if COM_RST TRUE and which is transferred to the FM when LOAD_PAR TRUE The end of the controller parameter is the end of the instance DB 72 0 72 1 P_SEL PFDB_SEL BOOL BOOL P action on P action in feedback path TRUE 2 FALSE 2 The PID algorithm allows individual PID actions to be switched on and off The proportional action is activated when the Activate P action component input is set In the PID algorithm the P and D actions can be included in the feedback path The proportional action is in the feedback path when the P action c
230. over into the FM 355 the operating bits LOAD_PAR or LOAD_OP are reset by the FM 355 Operation only when the CPU is at STOP or if the CPU fails monitor DB 101 to 1004 Parameter Operate and monitor when the CPU is in RUN Max 4 instance DBs of the Figure 3 31 Operator control and monitoring of the FM controlled by the READ_VAR parameter of the instance DB controlled by the LOAD_OP and LOAD_PAR parameters FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 How Does the FM 355 Control 3 7 Characteristics of the FM 355 3 7 Characteristics of the FM 355 Overview The following topics contain information about e The processing sequence and sampling time e Rules for operation e Startup reaction e Backup mode e Firmware update Sequence of execution The FM 355 executes the analog inputs and controller channels in a specified sequence Each controller channel is executed immediately after the execution and conditioning of the analog input with the same number Subsequently the analog input with the next highest number will be processed and so on The reference junction is processed after controller channel 4 The following figure shows the sequence of execution of the FM 355 Conversion times example Reference 100 ms Boot junction for analog inputs 1 t
231. pen the subrack Select the FM 355 from the module catalog Drag the FM 355 to the respective line of the configuration table From the configuration table note the input address of the module e g 272 The value that you read off is displayed in decimal format Parameter assignment After configuration you can start with the parameter assignment When assigning parameters you set the module parameters 1 Double click on the order number of the module in the configuration table or select the module and use the menu command Edit gt Object properties Result You end up in the Properties dialog box Click on the Basic parameters tab Result You end up in the Basic parameters dialog box 3 Parameterize the basic parameters of the module D Oo N O O Click on Parameter Result You end up in the parameterization interface Parameterize the module and save the parameters entered with File gt Save End the parameterization interface Save your project in the HW Config with Station gt Save and compile Transfer the parameter data with the CPU in STOP mode by selecting Target system gt Load gt Project Result The data is located in the CPU s memory and will be directly transferred from there to the module Carry out a CPU start up FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Parameter Configuration of the FM 355
232. put 20 ms 4 Figure 3 33 Sequence of execution of the FM 355 three inputs used The following sampling time results for each controller in the example shown in the previous figure at 50 Hz line frequency tsample 20 ms 20 ms 20 ms 0 ms 20 ms 80 ms Rules for operating the FM 355 The following rules can be summarized for operation with the FM 355 e The FM 355 controllers can be cascaded freely This means that you can switch the manipulated value of a controller channel to the setpoint value of another controller channel e The execution of a controller channel is carried out immediately after the conditioning of the analog input with the same number If a controller uses several analog inputs you should select the controller channel whose number corresponds to the highest number of the used analog inputs in order to reduce the dead times Example A controller requires the signals of Analog inputs 1 2 and 3 The smallest dead time results when Controller No 3 is selected e f you select the setting Analog input is not executed at the analog input the controller channel with the same number is then also not executed No additional sampling time is thus required for this analog input FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 3 37 How Does the FM 355 Control 3 7 Characteristics of the FM 355 e If the reference junction input is used
233. r gt Output variable t A y 100 Step response of the pulse controller 0 gt Output variable t Figure 2 6 Jump response of a PD action controller D action control elements are not suitable on their for controlling since they no longer emit an actuating command when the input variable has settled back to a static value In combination with P action control elements the derivative component is used to generate a corresponding control pulse depending on the change speed of the controlled variable FM 355 closed loop control module 2 8 Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Information for the controller adjustment 2 3 Control Response at Different Feedback Structures If a Disturbance x acts on the controlled system the PD action controller sets a different system deviation due to the changed degree of correction Disturbances are not corrected completely The good dynamic response is advantageous A well attenuated non oscillating transition is achieved during starting up and the reference input variable However a controller with D action is not appropriate if a controlled system has pulsing measured quantities for example at pressure or flow control systems Equation for PD action controller The following applies for the jump response of the PD action controller in the time range t TD TM_LAG y GAIN x xw xe TM_LAG t Duration since the jump of the input variable FM 355 closed loop
234. r PID action controller The following applies for the jump response of the Pl action controller in the time range t 1 TD TM_LAG x e Tixt TM_LAG y GAIN x xy x 1 t Duration since the jump of the input variable FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 2 13 Information for the controller adjustment 2 4 Choosing the controller structure with a given control section 2 4 Selection of the Suitable Controller Structures Amongst the closed control elements the controlled systems have a special position Their properties are determined by the process specific applications and cannot be changed afterwards An optimal control action result can thus only be achieved by the selection of a suitable controller whose response can be adapted to the system data within certain limits Choosing the controller structure with a given control section Controlled system Controller structure than PID disturbance Not self regulating Control without delay Control with delay Control without delay Control with delay P PD PI PID Pure dead time Unusable Unusable Control Unusable disturbance Dead time Unusable Unusable Slightly worse Control first order than PID disturbance time delay Dead time Not suitable Bad Worse than PID Control second order disturbance time delay Order Control Control at delay Disturbance
235. r and the corresponding blocks for PROFINET operation FM 355 455 PID Control blocks for the Centralized configuration and PROFIBUS operation FM 355 PROFINET blocks for the PROFINET operation FB31 PID_FM SFC58 WR_REC SFC59 RD_REC FB31 PID_FM SFB52 RDREC SFB53 WRREC FB32 FUZ_355 SFC58 WR_REC SFC59 RD_REC FB32 FUZ_355 SFB52 RDREC SFB53 WRREC FB34 FORCE355 SFC58 WR_REC FB34 FORCE355 SFB53 WRREC FB 36 READ_355 SFC59 RD_REC FB36 READ_355 SFB52 RDREC FB39 PID_PAR SFC58 WR_REC SFC54 RD_DPARM FB39 PID_PAR SFB53 WRREC SFC81 RD_DPAR FB 40 CJ_T_PAR SFC58 WR_REC SFC54 RD_DPARM FB40 CJ_T_PAR SFB53 WRREC SFC81 RD_DPAR CPUs with Micro Memory Card FB29 PID_PAR using SFC102 SFC58 WR_REC SFC102 RD_DPARA Use the FB39 Note however the different functions between FB39 und FB29 CPUs with Micro Memory Card FB30 CJ_T_PAR using SFC102 SFC58 WR_REC SFC102 RD_DPARA Use the FB40 Note however the different functions between FB40 and FB30 FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Commissioning the FM 355 Introduction In this chapter we show you in a few steps how to commission the FM 355 HW Installation and Wiring In order to obtain a better overview the commissioning process is divided into several small steps In this first section you install the FM 355 into your S7
236. r signal 1 from 13 to 30 V e For signal 0 from 3 to 5 V Input current e At signal 1 Typ 7 mA Input delay time e Configurable no e At 0 to 1 from 1 2 to 4 8 ms e At 1 to 0 from 1 2 to 4 8 ms Input characteristics To IEC 1131 Type 2 Connection of 2 wire BEROs Possible e Permissible quiescent current lt 1 5mA Data for Selecting a Sensor Analog Inputs Input ranges rated values display range input impedance FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 e Voltage 80 mV 80 to 80 mvV 10 MQ 0 to 10 V 1 175 to 11 75 V 100 kQ e Current 0 to 20 mA 3 5 to 23 5mA 50 Q 4 to 20 mA 0 to 23 5 mA 50 Q e Thermocouple type B 0 to 13 81 mV 42 15 C to 1820 01 C 10 MQ J 8 1 to 69 54 mV 210 02 C to 1200 02 C 10 MQ K 6 45 to 54 88 mV 265 40 C to 1372 11 C 10 MQ R 0 23 to 21 11 mV 51 37 C to 1767 77 C 10 MQ S 0 24 to 18 7 mV 50 40 C to 1767 98 C 10 MQ B 5 Data Sheet B 2 Technical Specifications FM 355 B 6 e Resistance thermometer single resolution double resolution fourfold resolution Pt 100 current 1 667 mA pulsed 30 82 650 46 mV 200 01 850 05 C 30 82 499 06 mV 200 01 C to 556 26 C 30 82 254 12 mV 200 01 C to 129 20 C 10 MQ External measuring resistor The same limits apply for underflo
237. r the CPU is started up transition from STOP to RUN 5 System data Downloading the system data at start up STOP gt RUN of the CPU Instance DB of the FB PID_FM LOAD_PAR TRUE COM_RST TRUE Figure 3 30 Parameter configuration of the FM 355 via system data and via the PID_FM FB The operating parameters for example setpoint manual manipulated value are transferred cyclically by the PID_FM FB to the FM 355 Operating parameters are all the parameters that lie between the op_par and cont_par variables in the instance data block To ensure this is possible without any great time expenditure in the CPU the transfer takes place via direct peripheral access not via the SFC WR_REC SFB WRREC Since only four bytes are available per channel in the I O address area of the module the data are multiplexed It can therefore take up to three cycles of the CPU or of the FM 355 until the operating values have been transferred to the FM 355 the respectively longer cycle is decisive FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 How Does the FM 355 Control Reference See also 3 6 Functional mechanisms and data storage in the FM 355 If you set the parameter LOAD_OP TRUE then the operating parameters will be transferred to the module in a program cycle via the SFC WR_REC SFB WRREC However this requires a higher run time refer to the technical specificatio
238. r via the parameter configuration tool Call Test gt Controller optimization The identification is started by a positive setpoint value step change whereby the following conditions have to be fulfilled e 1 Condition The minimum step change size Setpoint value step change gt 5 degrees e 2 Condition The setpoint value after the step change Setpoint value after gt Actual value Setpoint value limit x 0 12 with setpoint value limit Upper setpoint value limit of the controller It is also possible to restart the identification by reducing and then increasing the setpoint value The setpoint value has to fulfill Condition 2 after it has been increased Completing the Identification As long as the bit FUZID_ON TRUE the next identification is started whenever the setpoint value step change is sufficiently large We therefore recommend that the optimization mode be deactivated immediately after the identification has been completed FUZID_ON FALSE Information about the state of the identification is available through the IDSTATUS parameter of the CH_DIAG FB FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 3 43 How Does the FM 355 Control 3 8 Parameter optimization with temperature controllers Canceling Identification Identification can be canceled in the following cases e By the controller if a critical controlled system is identified After canceling the controller
239. rameter LOAD_PAR is set All the control parameters are loaded permanently to the EEPROM of the FM 355 2 Operating parameters Operating parameters are downloaded to the module if the in out parameter LOAD_OP is set See also rror display from the group error LED Page 12 1 Parameter optimization with temperature controllers Page 3 41 11 52 FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Faults and Diagnostics 12 1 When does the group error Error display from the group error LED light up LED If the red group error LED lights up there is either an error on the module internal error or in the line connections external error If the yellow LED flashes then the firmware has been deleted This status can only occur in the case of faulty hardware or if the loading procedure of the firmware is aborted Which errors are displayed The following errors are displayed by the group error LED lighting up Type of error Internal errors Diagnostic message Module defective Possible cause Hardware error Correction Replace the module Time watchdog tripped Hardware error Replace the module EEPROM content is invalid Failure of the supply voltage when configuring Reconfigure module External errors Incorrect parameters in module Incorrect parameters have been transferred to the module Reconfigure module
240. rameter configuration using the File gt Save menu item o FM 355 closed loop control module 8 2 Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Commissioning the FM 355 Saving Parameter Configuration Data and Transferring Them to the FM 355 After you have completed the parameter configuration you have to save the data and prepare the system for operation Step What to do s 1 Terminate the parameter configuration interface o 2 Save the project via the File gt Save and compile menu o 3 Switch the CPU to the STOP mode qo 4 Transfer the data to the CPU via the Download to PLC menu qo The data are transferred directly to the CPU and to the FM 355 Creating an Instance DB An instance DB has to be created for each controller channel so that you can use the functions of the module Step What to do s 1 Create the instance DBs for the controller channels as data blocks with an o assigned FB 31 PID_FM function block 2 Enter the module address in the MOD_ADDR parameter at every instance DB o You wrote down the address while configuring the hardware with STEP 7 3 Enter the channel number for every instance DB in the CHANNEL parameters o Commissioning the FM 355 You can now optimize and test your controlled system Step What to do s 1 Switch the CPU to the RUN mode o 2 Open the parameter configuration interface and measure the motor
241. rd DSO is automatically transferred to the start information when the diagnostic OBs are called There these four bytes are stored in the local data byte 8 11 of the OB 82 The diagnostic data record DS1 and hence also the content of the DSO can be read from the module by means of SFC 59 RD_REC or SFB 52 RDREC It only makes sense to do this if a fault in a channel is signaled in DSO The SFC 59 or SFB 52 must be called in the same OB as the FB PID_FM This is achieved by the following measure Set a bit while the OB 82 is being executed Query this bit in the OB in which the FB PID_FM is also called and then with a set bit call the SFC 59 or SFB 52 How Does the Diagnostics Text Appear in the Diagnostics Buffer If you want to enter the diagnostics message in the diagnostics buffer you must call the SFC 52 Enter user specific message in diagnostics buffer in the user program The event number of the respective diagnostics message is specified in the input parameter EVENTN The interrupt is entered in the diagnostics buffer with x 1 as incoming and with x 0 as outgoing The diagnostics buffer contains the relevant diagnostics text in the Meaning column as well as the time of the entry Assignments of the Diagnostics Record DSO in the Start Information The following table shows the assignments of the diagnostics record DSO in the start information All unlisted bits are not significant and are set to zero Table 12 1 Assign
242. rdance with the requirements With the aid of the digital inputs the module can be interconnected to different operating modes C controllers and S controllers have the same structure in the case of analog and digital inputs FM 355 closed loop control module 3 4 Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 How Does the FM 355 Control 3 3 FM 355 inputs 3 3 1 Analog inputs Function blocks of an analog input Sensor type HHEH r HEHE Preprocessed Filter Square root Polyline Standardize analog value Reference input O configured O Figure 3 3 Analog value conditioning Adapting to sensors The analog inputs can be configured for adaptation to different sensors The following settings are possible e Analog input is not being processed e g unused input e Power sensors 0 mA to 20 mA e Power sensors 4 mA to 20 mA e Voltage sensors 0 V to 10 V e Pt 100 200 850 C e Pt 100 200 556 C double resolution e Pt 100 200 130 C quadruple resolution e Thermocouple elements type B J K R and S analog input set to 80 mV e Free thermocouple element analog input set to 80 mV You configure the analog inputs in the analog input screen Adapting to line frequency To suppress interference when measuring analog signals the input signal processing is adapted to the line frequency The following settings are possible
243. riables 100 rrr fprrrytrryttry rt try try rrr yr irr yt 17 15 17 16 17 17 17 18 17 19 17 20 17 21 17 22 17 23 Figure 13 8 Control system with continuous action controller and setpoint step changes across the entire measuring range FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 13 9 Examples 13 3 Application Example for Diagnostics 13 3 Application Example for Diagnostics Introduction Prerequisites The FM_PIDEx project contains the example SIMATIC 300 Station3 C that shows you the application and the evaluation of the diagnostics in the DS1 of the controller module Requirements for working with the example e CPU 314 is inserted at Slot 2 e FM 355 Cis inserted at Slot 4 e CPU and FM 355 C are supplied with power e Online connection programming device PC to the CPU exists If you want to use a different CPU or FM355 you have to adapt the example under the hardware configuration section Note Diagnostic interrupts are only triggered in the CPU if you select the following settings at the Basic parameters tab in the Properties FM 355 C PID Control window under HW Config e Interrupt generation Yes e Interrupt selection Diagnosis Loading the Example Program Download the Blocks user program with the system data to the CPU Application of the Example Program See also 13 10 If a diagnostics interrupt occurs the DIAG_ON parameter of the FB1 FM
244. rivative unit is de activated 44 0 TM_LAG REAL Time lag of the TM_LAG gt 0 5 5 0 The algorithm of the PID 1 derivative action D part includes a time Controller s lag that can be assigned to the Time lag of the D part input 48 0 LMN_SAFE REAL Safety 100 0 100 0 0 0 For the manipulated Switching 1 manipulated value value a security to safety value can be manipulat configured on the ed value Security manipulated controller value input 52 0 LMN_HLM REAL Manipulated value LMN_LLM 100 0 100 0 The manipulated Limits of 1 high limit variable is always manipulat limited to an high and ed value a low limit The controller Upper limit of manipulated value input specifies the upper limit this does not apply to step action controllers without analog position feedback 56 0 LMN_LLM REAL Manipulated value 100 0 LMN_HLM 0 0 The manipulated Limits of 1 low limit variable is always manipulat limited to an high and ed value a low limit The controller Lower limit of manipulated value input specifies the lower limit this does not apply to step action controllers without analog position feedback FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 11 37 Assignment of the Instance DBs 11 8 Assignment of the DBs for Operator Control and Monitoring via OP Addr Parameter Data Comment Permitted
245. river to install and remove the FM 355 Installing the FM 355 The following section describes how to install the FM 355 on the mounting rail Manual 1 contains further notes on installing modules 1 Switch the CPU to STOP mode 2 A bus connector is enclosed with the FM 355 Plug this into the bus connector of the module to the left of the FM 355 The bus connector is located on the back and you may have to loosen the neighboring module 3 Hang the FM 355 onto the rail and swing it down 4 Tighten the screw on the FM 355 tightening torque approximately 0 8 to 1 1 Nm If further modules are to be installed to the right of the FM 355 first connect the bus connector of the next module to the right hand backplane bus connector of the FM 355 If the FM 355 is the last module in the rack do not connect a bus connector 5 Label the FM 355 with its slot number Use the number wheel supplied with the CPU for this purpose Manual 1 describes the numbering scheme you must use and how to connect the slot numbers 6 Install the shield contact element Removing the FM 355 or Replacing a Module The following section describes how to remove the FM 355 Manual 1 contains further notes on removing modules Switch off the supply voltage L at the front connector Switch the CPU to STOP mode Open the front door panels If necessary remove the labeling strips Release the front connectors and pull them out Loosen t
246. rol module 13 2 Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Examples 13 1 Application example for the FM 355 S The parameter for the motor actuating time MTR_TM defines the time that the actuator requires to pass from end stop to end stop QLMNR_HS QLMNR_LS DISV GAIN INV_UP gt l OUTV H X gt c INV_DOWN gt MTR_TM_ LMNR_HLM TM_LAG1 TM_LAG2 TM_LAG3 LMNR_LLM Figure 13 2 Structure and parameters of the controlled system block PROC_S Block Structure Example 1 consists of the function APP_1 that encompasses the blocks for the controller and the simulated controlled system as well as of the call blocks for restarting OB 100 and a watchdog interrupt level OB 35 with 100 ms cycle Table 13 1 Blocks of Example 1 Block Name Description in the toolbar OB 100 Restart OB OB 35 Time controlled OB 100 ms FC100 APP_1 Example 1 FC101 SIM_355 Process value transfer in the controller module S FB 31 PID_FM Step controller in the controller module S FB 100 PROC_S Controlled system for step controller DB 100 PROCESS Instance DB for PROC_S DB 31 DB_PID_FM Instance DB for PID_FM FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 13 3 Examples 13 1 Application example for the FM 355 S Parameters of the Model Controlled System for Step Controller
247. rror display from the group error LED Page 12 1 Instance DB of the FUZ_355 FB The FUZ_355 FB can be used to read the controller parameters of the fuzzy temperature controller out of the FM 355 You can then for example transfer these parameters back to the module after you have replaced the FM 355 Note You may not change the parameters determined through identification by the FM 355 since they have been optimized for the process The following tables list the parameters of this instance DB e Input parameters e Output parameters FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Assignment of the Instance DBs 11 2 Instance DB of the FUZ_355 FB Input Parameters Table 11 4 Input parameters of the instance DB for the FUZ_355 FB Addr Parameter Data Comment Permitted range of Default Explanation In para type English values setting meter configu ration mask 0 0 MOD_ADDR_ INT FM 355 455 256 This input contains the module address module address resulting from the configuration with STEP 7 Output Parameters Table 11 5 Output parameters of the instance DB for the FUZ_355 FB Addr Parameter Data Comment Permitted range of Default Explanation In the type English values setting parameter assign ment screen form 2 0 RET_VALU WORD Return value 0 RET_VALU includes SFC 58 59 the return value SFB 52 53 RET_VAL of the SFC 58 59 W
248. ructure setpoint steps act directly on the controller The manipulated variable is influenced directly via the P and D action components through setpoint steps However a different structure of the controller in which the formation of the P action and D action components is moved to the feedback guarantees a smooth course of the manipulated variable at step changes in the reference variable see following figure In this structure the l action component processes the negative deviation as the input signal Only the negative controlled variable factor 1 is fed forward to the P action and D action components In the D action component the changeover to the feedback is carried out in the Negative deviation window via the D action input controller switch by selecting the negated effective actual value as the input signal The input variable of the D action component can also be selected via the D_EL_SEL parameter of the PID_FM function block GAIN S 1 PV Ia gt LMN IE Figure 3 14 Control algorithm with P and D action component in the feedback path FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 How Does the FM 355 Control 3 4 Controller Reversing of the Controller Action Reversal means changing the controller from the assignment e Rising controlled variable Rising manipulated variable to e Rising controlled variable Falling manipulate
249. s Tables Table 1 1 Table 1 2 Table 2 1 Table 3 1 Table 3 2 Table 3 3 Table 3 4 Table 3 5 Table 5 1 Table 5 2 Table 7 1 Table 7 2 Table 11 1 Table 11 2 Table 11 3 Table 11 4 Table 11 5 Table 11 6 Table 11 7 Table 11 8 Table 11 9 Table 11 10 Table 11 11 Table 11 12 Table 11 13 Table 11 14 Table 11 15 Table 11 16 Table 11 17 Table 11 18 Table 12 1 Table 12 2 Table 13 1 Table 13 2 Table A 1 Table A 2 Inputs and outputs of the the FM 355 ccccccccececeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeseceeeeeeeeesesecaeeeeeeesesecieaeeeeeaaeaqens 1 3 Diagnostics and Status LED S rics 5ccccds decedesteceneecass a aaa 1 7 Suitable Controller for the Most Important Control Variables ccccceceeeseeeeeeeeteenees 2 15 Signal selection for setpoint value D action input and disturbance variable 205 3 13 Functions of the controller output and setting possibilities c cee ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeees 3 26 Assignment and meaning of the digital outputs 00 0 2 eee ceeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeteneeeeteneaeeeeeaees 3 29 Conversion time of an analog input o oo eee eee ceeeee ee eeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeaaeeeeeenaeeeeenee nats 3 36 Rules for the conversion time cecececeseeteeeeeeeeeee essence eeseaeeeeseaeeeeeseeeeeseneeeeeseeeeeeseneeteenaeees 3 36 Terminal assignment of the front connectors of the FM 355 C ceeeeceeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeedeas 5 2 Terminal assignment of the
250. s configurable FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Time per channel Integration time Conversion time Resolution e Configurable e Integration time 162 3 ms 20 ms 100 ms e Basic conversion time incl processing time 17 ms 22 ms 102 ms e Additional conversion time for resistance ims ims 1 ms measurement e Additional conversion time for reference junction 162 3 ms 20 ms 100 ms input B 7 Data Sheet B 2 Technical Specifications FM 355 Further data for selecting a sensor analog inputs e Resolution in bits including overshoot range 12 12 14 measuring range e Interference voltage suppression at interference 60 50 50 60 frequency f1 in Hz Applies if a resolution of 14 bits is configured at at least one input FM 355 closed loop control module B 8 Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Data Sheet B 3 Technical Specitications of Function Blocks B 3 Technical Specifications of Function Blocks Technical Specifications of the Function Blocks Table B 1 Technical specifications of the function blocks Function Assignment in Processing time in RICEKS RAM Load memory Local data CPU 314 CPU 414 area PID_FM 1592 bytes 1976 bytes 40 bytes Refer to following table FORCE355 630 bytes 790 bytes 52 bytes 2 2 ms 2
251. s is normalized to an engineering value by means of the normalizing constant of the selected actual value channel e Multiplication At the ratio controller controller type Actual value A is used as the controlled variable Actual value D as the ratio variable The setpoint value input serves as the ratio factor It is conditioned as the effective setpoint value by multiplication with Actual value D and addition of an offset that can be set If Actual value D is deactivated only the offset is added to the setpoint value Actual Value Conditioning Interrupt 3 14 In the case of the fixed setpoint or cascade controllers and ratio controllers control structures the effective actual value is identical with Actual value A In the case of the Three component controllers control structure the effective actual value is formed by totaling the three actual values A B and C and by adding an offset that can be set Actual values B and C can be evaluated additionally through factors A limit monitoring function is implemented in the controller module This allows e either the negative deviation or e the effective actual value to be monitored to an upper and lower warning limit and an upper and lower interrupt limit In addition you can set a hysteresis for these limits refer to the following figure Lower warning and FH Upper warning and interrupt limits interrupt limits A Incoming interrupt Y outgoing interrupt H hystere
252. s set on the external manipulated value LMN_RE manual 1 40 5 QLMNR_HS BOOL High limit signal of repeated manipulated value FALSE The output Upper end stop signal of position feedback indicates whether the control valve is at its upper limit QLMNR_HS TRUE means The control valve is at its upper limit For step controllers only FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Assignment of the Instance DBs 11 1 Instance DB of the PID_FM FB Addr 40 6 Parameter QLMNR_LS Data type BOOL Comment English Low limit signal of repeated manipulated value Permitted range of values Default setting FALSE Explanation The output Lower end stop signal of position feedback indicates whether the control valve is at its lower limit QLMNR_LS TRUE means The control valve is at its lower limit For step controllers only In the parameter assign ment screen form 40 7 QLMNR_ON BOOL Repeated manipulated value on FALSE The output position feedback on shows the set mode step controller with position feedback or step controller without position feedback 41 0 QFUZZY BOOL PID algorithm 0 fuzzy 1 FALSE If the output QFUZZY 1 is set the controller operates with the fuzzy algorithm QSPLEPV BOOL Fuzzy display Setpoin
253. sable when testing the parameter configuration during commissioning FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 How Does the FM 355 Control 3 6 Functional mechanisms and data storage in the FM 355 If you change the parameters via the parameter configuration interface and then download them directly into the FM 355 step changes can occur in the manipulated value course In order to achieve a controlled manipulated value course we recommend the following procedure 1 Switch to manual operation for example via the loop display 2 Change the parameters 3 Download them directly into the FM 355 4 Switch to automatic operation for example via the loop display Data Flow during Parameter Configuration via the Parameter Configuration Interface The following figure shows the path of the parameter configuration data from the parameter configuration interface to the FM 355 Parameter assignment interface A HW Config b Offline dat storage Downloading directly to the FM Download from HW Config System data Downloading the system data at start up STOP gt RUN of the CPU Figure 3 29 Parameter configuration of the FM 355 via the programming device and via the CPU FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition
254. sed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Implementing the FM 355 in the User Program 7 2 The function block PID_FM At which points are the parameters of the PID_FM FB generated The following figures show at which points in the module the output parameters of the PID_FM FB are generated QUPRLM QSPHLM Switching Ramp Limiting safety set Set point point ER ie QDNRLM QSPLLM SP_RE ZA a CP Effective set point gt signal PV QH_ALM QSPOPON Effective process value e _ D input gt Process value A e DISV gt gt Disturbance variable Figure 7 8 Negative deviation generation at fixed setpoint or cascade controller QSPLEPV QFUZZY gt effective setpoint MA to effective process value Temperature gt controller effective manipulated variable PID Error signal r k Dead zone D input K Manipulated variable follow up Disturbance variable Figure 7 9 Block diagram of the control algorithm FM 355 closed loop control module 7 11 Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Implementing the FM 355 in the User Program 7 2 The function block PID_FM
255. sis Figure 3 11 Hysteresis for warning and interrupt limits FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 How Does the FM 355 Control 3 4 Controller Control Algorithm At the control algorithm you can select between the following operating modes e Temperature controller self tuning fuzzy controller e PID action controller Continuous action controllers and step controllers have the same control algorithm structure refer to the following figure effective setpoint MA effective process value Temperature controller effective manipulated variable PID gt Error signal 7 Dead zone D input x Manipulated variable follow up Disturbance variable Figure 3 12 Block diagram of the control algorithm Temperature Controller The temperature controller is a self tuning fuzzy controller that operates with self determined control parameters after an identification of the controlled system The following settings are possible at the temperature controller e Cooling controller e Heating controller e Aggressivity You can influence the speed of the transient behavior by using the Aggressivity parameter Possible values for the aggressivity 1 lt Aggressivity lt 0 Slower transient response than determined via identification Aggressivity 0 Transient response as determined via identification 0 lt Aggressivity lt
256. stance Thermometers 10 3 Connecting Voltage Sensors Current Sensors and Resistance Thermometers Introduction The following figures show how to connect voltage sensors current sensors and resistance thermometers Abbreviations Used The abbreviations used in the figures below have the following meaning Ict Constantcurrent line positive lc Constantcurrent line negative M Measuring line positive M Measuring line negative Mana Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit M Ground terminal L Power supply 24 V DC In addition to the information below the information contained in the section Connecting Measuring Transducers to Analog Inputs applies In the figures below the required connecting lines between the M connection of the CPU M Mana and the potential to ground which result from the potential connection of the FM 355 to the sensor insulated non insulated are not shown This means that you must continue to observe and implement the information given in the section Connecting Measuring Transducers to Analog Inputs Connection of Voltage Sensors The following figure shows the connection of voltage sensors to an FM 355 L FM 355 M Q M i M ADC Logic Processing in Q iz the FM 355 MANA Figure 10 6 Connection of voltage sensors FM 355 closed loop control module 10 10 Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E0005934
257. t 0 3 REAL Polyline interpolation point 1 input side 4 REAL Polyline interpolation point 2 input side 5 REAL Polyline interpolation point 3 input side 6 REAL Polyline interpolation point 4 input side 7 REAL Polyline interpolation point 5 input side 8 REAL Polyline interpolation point 6 input side 9 REAL Polyline interpolation point 7 input side 10 REAL Polyline interpolation point 8 input side 11 REAL Polyline interpolation point 9 input side 12 REAL Polyline interpolation point 10 input 13 side REAL Polyline interpolation point 11 input 14 side REAL Polyline interpolation point 12 input 15 side REAL Polyline interpolation point 13 input 16 side REAL Polyline interpolation point 1 output 17 side REAL Polyline interpolation point 2 output 18 side REAL Polyline interpolation point 3 output 19 side REAL Polyline interpolation point 4 output 20 side REAL Polyline interpolation point 5 output 21 side REAL Polyline interpolation point 6 output 22 side REAL Polyline interpolation point 7 output 23 side REAL Polyline interpolation point 8 output 24 side REAL Polyline interpolation point 9 output 25 side REAL Polyline interpolation point 10 output 26 side REAL Polyline interpolation point 11 output 27 side FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 FB 29 and FB 30 A 7 The FB 29 PID_PAR function block
258. t 10 COMP Reference junction input 10 pos 11 COMP Reference junction input 11 1 Q1 Analog output neg 12 3 IC Constantcurrent line pos 12 Mana Reference point of the analog circuit 13 IC Constantcurrent line neg 13 2 Q2 Analog output 14 M Measuring line pos 14 Mana Reference point of the analog circuit 15 M Measuring line neg 15 3 Q3 Analog output 16 4 IC Constantcurrent line pos 16 Mana Reference point of the analog circuit 17 IC Constantcurrent line neg 17 4 Q4 Analog output 18 M Measuring line pos 18 Mana Reference point of the analog circuit 19 M Measuring line neg 19 20 Mana Reference point of the 20 M Mass of the supply voltage analog circuit 24V DC Note The Mana connections have to be connected with low impedance to the central ground connection If you supply the encoders externally you must also connect the ground of this external voltage with the ground of the CPU FM 355 closed loop control module 5 2 Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Wiring the FM 355 5 7 Terminal assignment of the front connectors FM 355 S front connectors The analog inputs the digital inputs and outputs and the power supply of the module are connected via the two 20 pin front connectors of the FM 355 S The following figure shows the front of the module a front connector and the inside of the front panels with the pin assignments
259. t lt process variable FALSE The output Display of FUZZY controller set value lt actual value is set when the fuzzy controller is switched on if the set value is less than the effective actual value 41 2 QSPR BOOL Split range operation FALSE If the output Split range operation is set the continuous controller is operating in split range mode FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Assignment of the Instance DBs 11 1 Instance DB of the PID_FM FB Addr Parameter Data Comment Permitted range of Default Explanation In the type English values setting parameter assign ment screen form 41 4 QMAN_FC BOOL Manual mode or FALSE The output QMAN_FC anti reset is set in the following windup by two cases follower the slave controller is in controller manual mode and the main controller is followed up to the actual value of the slave controller The I action component of the master controller is stopped because the setpoint value or manipulated variable of the secondary controller is limited or because the secondary controller is in manual mode 41 7 QPARABUB_ BOOL Internal value FALSE This parameter is set by the FM when operating parameters are changed via the OP If READ_VAR TRUE and if this display is set by the FM the PID_FM FB reads the parameters SP_OP_ON LMNOP_ON SP_OP
260. t 1 a00 fo ro 17 IEA mm 17 CH4 D C C c H2 io 108 ae 8 0 500 o fo 19 DNL d 19 x 2 rol 2 20 20 M 20 o Sti i p ANA M 355 0VH00 0AE0 Figure 5 1 Terminal assignment of the front connectors of the FM 355 C Front view of the module Front connectors Terminal assignment of the left hand front connector 0O00 Terminal assignment of the right hand front connector FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 5 1 Wiring the FM 355 5 7 Terminal assignment of the front connectors Front Connector Assignment of the FM 355 C Table 5 1 Terminal assignment of the front connectors of the FM 355 C Left hand front connector Right hand front connector Conne Analog Name Function Conne Analog Name Function ction input ction output 1 1 L 24 V DC supply voltage 2 1 IC Constantcurrent line pos 2 1 Digital input 3 IC Constantcurrent line neg 3 12 Digital input 4 M Measuring line pos 4 13 Digital input 5 M Measuring line neg 5 14 Digital input 6 2 IC Constantcurrent line pos 6 15 Digital input 7 IC Constantcurrent line neg 7 16 Digital input 8 M Measuring line pos 8 I7 Digital input 9 M Measuring line neg 9 18 Digital inpu
261. t range correction safety pulse shaper manipulated variable gt Correction input Manipulated variable follow up Figure 7 5 FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 7 9 Controller output of the step controller pulse controller operating mode Implementing the FM 355 in the User Program 7 2 The function block PID_FM external manipu lated NO va gore J effective Switch MTR TM manipu external Manipulated ar lated manipu vanable variable lated value NO NO 3 BREAK_TM a Switch Switching Limiting correction safety Pulse manipulated shaper e variable gt I b Correction input e Position feedback input Figure 7 6 Controller output of the step controller step controller operating mode with position feedback external manipulated variable ES 2 2 effective Switch manipu external lated manipu variable lated value ee ie Se LMNDN_OP LMNUP_OP LMNSOPON LMNRS_ON MTR TM Actuating PULSE_TM signal BREAK_TM O high LMNRSVAL 9 Pee ae _ J low L o Switching Pulse safety shaper manipulated variable _ LMNRHSRE LMNRLSRE Figure 7 7 Controller output of the step controller step controller operating mode without position feedback FM 355 clo
262. ted variable lated value NO pE variable Switch Switching Limiting Split range correction safety pulse shaper manipulated n variable gt e Correction input Manipulated variable follow up Figure 3 24 Controller output of the step controller pulse controller operating mode Split Range Function Pulse Generator The split range function is the preparation of the analog signal for conversion to a binary signal In the case of a two step controller for example a heating controller only manipulated variable A is relevant The conversion of the manipulated value to the manipulated value A is shown in the figure below Split range function two step controller The conversion to a binary output signal is carried out so that the ratio of pulse length to period duration corresponds to the manipulated value A at the assigned digital output For example a manipulated value A of 40 at a period duration of 60 seconds results in a pulse length of 24 seconds and a pause duration of 36 seconds FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 3 23 How Does the FM 355 Control 3 4 Controller The classification of the digital outputs to the controller channels can be found in the table in the section FM 355 outputs Manipulated variable A output signal Start of output signal range wits ae Se ee Laai Manipulated variable LMN input End of output signal range
263. ter is shown by cont_par 48 0 SP_RE REAL External setpoint Technical range of values physical variable 0 0 An external setpoint is connected to the controller at the external setpoint input 52 0 LMN_RE REAL External manipulated value 100 0 100 0 0 0 An external manipulated value is interconnected to the controller at the input External manipulated value 56 0 SP_OP_ON BOOL Setpoint operation on FALSE The configuration tool has access to the through parameter Setpoint operation on If the bit is set the value SP_OP is used as the setpoint value 11 12 FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Assignment of the Instance DBs 11 1 Instance DB of the PID_FM FB Addr 56 1 56 2 Parameter SAFE_ON LMNOP_ON 1 Data type BOOL BOOL Comment English Safety position on Manipulated value operation on Permitted range of values Default setting FALSE FALSE Explanation If the assume safety position input is set a security value is adopted as the manipulated value Note The actuating signal processing via LMNDN_OP LMNUP_OP and LMNSOPON with step controllers has greater priority than the safety manipulated variable The configuration tool has access to the through parameter Manipulated variable operatio
264. th simulated PT 3rd order controlled system is shown by means of a concrete parameter configuration of the continuous action controller with PID action The set system parameters with 10 s delay time each approximately simulate the behavior of a pressure control system or a filling level control system Setting one of the delay times to TM_LAGx 0 s reduces the order of the system by one degree The curve diagram configuration tool shows the dynamic and transient response of the closed loop circuit after a series of setpoint changes of 20 percent each of the measuring range refer to the figure below The table contains the currently set values of the relevant parameters for controller and controlled system Parameter Type Parameterization Description Controller GAIN REAL 1 535 P action coefficient TI TIME 22 720 s Integration time TD TIME 5 974 s Derivative time TM_LAG TIME 1 195 s D action component delay time Controlled system CYCLE TIME 100 ms Sampling time GAIN REAL 1 5 Servo gain TM_LAG1 TIME 10s Time lag 1 TM_LAG2 TIME 10s Time lag 2 TM_LAG3 TIME 10s Time lag 3 FM 355 closed loop control module 13 8 Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Examples 13 2 Application example for the FM 355 C Step Response 100 Output Variable 50 i 0 1 a 50 a Controlled va
265. the parameters to be completely sent to the FM 355 via SFC 58 The BUSY parameter has the value TRUE as long as the transmission is ongoing and RET_VALU is does not equal zero Changes in the reference temperature are not transmitted during this period The internal sampling time of the FM 355 must also be taken into consideration here Note Note Note that the reference junction temperature you change by using FB 30 CJ_T_PAR is overwritten by the parameters of the system data when the CPU starts up FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 A 11 FB 29 and FB 30 A 4 Instance DB of the FB 30 A 4 Instance DB of the FB 30 Introduction The parameters of the instance DB are listed in the following tables e Input parameters e Output parameters e Through parameters Input parameters Table A 5 Input parameters of the instance DB for the FB 30 CJ_T_PAR Address Parameter Data type Comment Permitted Default Explanation In the English range of setting parameter values assignment screen form 0 0 MOD_ADDR INT FM 355 455 256 The module address module that resulted from the address configuration with STEP 7 is given at this input 2 0 CJ_T REAL Cold junction depending 0 0 The reference junction temperature on sensor temperature can be type specified via the CJ_T parameter FM 355 closed loop control module A 12 Operating
266. the signal for switching to the safety value for the manipulated varaible of the controller 0 Selected only via SAFE_ON parameter of FB PID_FM 1 to 8 Selection via SAFE_ON parameter of FB PID_FM ORed with digital input 1 to 8 57 INT Selecting the signal for switching over to tracking function of the manipulated variable of the controller 0 Selected only via LMNTRKON parameter of FB PID_FM 1 to 8 Selection via LMNTRKON parameter of FB PID_FM ORed with digital input 1 to 8 58 FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 FB 29 and FB 30 A 1 The FB 29 PID_PAR function block Data type INT Description Selecting the signal for switching over the manipulated variable of the controller to LMN_RE 0 Selected only via LMN_REON parameter of FB PID_FM 1 to 8 Selection via LMN_REON parameter of FB PID_FM ORed with digital input 1 to 8 Index number 59 INT Selection of the upper stop signal of the position feedback 0 Selected only via LMNRHSRE parameter of FB PID_FM 1 to 8 Selection via LMNRHSRE parameter of FB PID_FM ORed with digital input 1 to 8 60 INT Selection of the lower stop signal of the position feedback 0 Selected only via LMNRLSRE parameter of FB PID_FM 1 to 8 Selection via LMNRLSRE parameter of FB PID_FM ORed with digital input 1 to 8 61 A 6 FM 355 closed loop control mod
267. the unit in which the control variable is influenced by the manipulated variable by changing the control energy or the flow dimension This enables subdivisions in the control device and the influenced process Controller A controller is a device that constantly records the negative deviation comparer and if necessary generates a time dependent function to form the control signal output variable with the objective of iradicating the negative deviation as quickly as possible and without overshooting Controller parameters Controller parameters are parameters for the static and dynamic adaptation of the controller behavior to the given section or process properties D part derivative component The D part is the derivative component of the controller D elements alone are unsuitable for controlling as they do not issue an output signal when setting the input variables to a stead value Dead time Dead time is the time delay for the control variable reaction to disturbances or changes to the manipulated variable for transportation processes The input variable of a dead time element is set to the value of the dead time 1 1 is issued on the output Digital control sample controlling digital control Controller that records a new value for the control variable process value at constant intervals gt sampling time and then in dependence on the actual negative deviation calculates a new value for the manipulated variable
268. ting Loads Actuators to Digital Outputs 2 0 ec ee eeeee ee entee ee ete ee ee tae eeetaeeeeetnaeeeeee 10 15 Assignment of the Instance DBS ccccccesseceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeesceenseeseeeeeecneneeeeeeeeseeeeeeseesanes 11 1 11 1 Instance DB of the PID_LFM FB eee eecceeeeneeeeceeeenneeeeeeaaeeeeeaaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaeeeesenaeeeesiaeeeeae 11 1 11 2 Instance DB of the FUZ_355 FB 00 eccceeceeeeee cee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeseneeeeeseeeeeeseneaeeesenaees 11 20 11 3 Instance DB of the FB FORCE355 eccccccccceeececeeceeeeeeeeceeeeecaeeesaaeeecaeeceeeeseeeeseaeeeeaeeseeeeees 11 23 FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Table of contents 11 4 Instance DB of the READ_355 FB cescceecceeececeeeceaeceaeceaeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeesaeseaeseaeeeueeeeeseenaes 11 26 11 5 Instance DB of the GH DIAG FE sscsegeis deca vestseceduyssgace dates aai aE tas deaeveabeeedesaad 11 28 11 6 Instance DB of the PID PAR FB visescceeccecexissacdexcssnusecevisaa seas yeceay dan cases encecsiaadee daadeadnayeeteanea 11 31 11 7 Instance DB ofthe CL TPAR F Bis sccvsissccedustucceveys secccdevexnsiecadeahecadlsancceunaasecvedsdpaaveahnes Sateeedseaee 11 33 11 8 Assignment of the DBs for Operator Control and Monitoring via OP essees 11 35 12 Faults and Diagnostics ccccccceeeeceeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeaaaeeeeaaaeesegaeeesegaaeeeeeeaaeeeeesaaeeeeeeesegaeeeese
269. tion Continuous action controller Three step controllers 3 23 Two step controllers 3 Split range manipulated values Square root 3 6 Standardization 3 6 Start addresses Startup behavior At separate power supply General Status LEDs Meaning 1 Step and pulse controller FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Index Step controller Step response Time response from determining Supply voltage L M Switching Temperature measurement System parameters Determining for 2 3 step controllers 2 18 Determining for cooling controllers 2 21 T Technical specifications FM 355 Function blocks FBs Parameter configuration interface Temperature controlled systems Important characteristic values 2 3 Temperature measurement Celsius Fahrenheit Thermocouple Connecting Connection alternatives Method of operation Reference junction 10 6 Structure Types With configured compensation With external compensation Three step controllers 2 6 3 24 Split range function 3 23 FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Time lag of the D action TM_LAG TM_LAG Tracking input Two step controllers Split range function With feedback 2 5 Without feedback 2 4 Two wire measuring transducer Connecting 10 1 10 11 U UL approval User program Connection V Var
270. to 4 are displayed at parameters DIAG 1 PV_PER to DIAG 4 PV_PER in the unit mA or mV respectively If the simulation of the conditioned physical analog input value is activated via the FORCE355 FB the simulated value is displayed DIAG i PV_PER 1 lt i lt 4 DIAG i PV_PHY Sensor type m Hee r Iel Hke Ie cessed analog value Filter Square root Polyline Standardize Reference O CJ_TEMP input Reference configured 4 junction temperature Figure 7 15 Displayed input value The output parameter RET_VALU contains the feedback value RET_VAL of the SFCs RD_REC and WR_REC With the blocks for PROFINET operation the RET_VAL includes the 2nd and 3rd bytes of the STATUS parameter of the SFB RDREC and WRREC The values of RET_VALU are described in the reference manual 2 Instance DB of the READ_355 FB Page 11 26 FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 7 19 Implementing the FM 355 in the User Program 7 6 The CH_DIAG function block 7 6 The CH_DIAG function block Use The CH_DIAG FB reads out further channel specific parameters from the module to support commissioning The CH_DIAG FB does not require an initialization run It is normally called cyclically Creating and Supplying an Instance DB Before you program the mod
271. to an effective setpoint value can be influenced by the following parameter configuration possibilities e Switching the safety setpoint value The following can be set here A safety setpoint value The reaction of the controller module at a CPU failure The reaction of the controller module at a startup The alternatives for the reaction of the controller module are Setpoint value Last setpoint value Setpoint value Safety setpoint value e Ramp You can limit the speed of change of the setpoint value by selecting a ramp up time from the engineering starting value to end value e Limiting Normalizing The setpoint value is limited to a specifiable lower and upper limit when the setpoint value is specified by the function block or when the setpoint value is a conditioned analog value of an analog input FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 3 13 How Does the FM 355 Control 3 4 Controller If in the case of ratio controllers a controller output is chosen as the set value then this value acts as a factor for the multiplication of the actual value D The set value that is given at the input in is in this case converted standardized with the aid of the bottom and top barriers If the manipulated value of another controller is used as the setpoint value at a fixed setpoint or cascade controller for example at the cascade control function thi
272. tput signal range End of output sig range variable LMN input Manipulated signal Start of input signal End of input range signal range Figure 3 22 Split range function manipulated value A The following figure shows the effect of the parameters for the output manipulated value B Manipulated variable B output signal A Start of output signal range End of output signal range Manipulated variable LMN input Start of input signal End of input signal range signal range Figure 3 23 Split range function manipulated value B The start of range of the input signal must be smaller than the end of range of the input signal FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 How Does the FM 355 Control 3 4 Controller Analog Output And the analog output you can select the signal that is to be output for each channel This is usually the Manipulated value A of a controller However you can also select the Manipulated value B of a controller or also an analog input value The latter can be used for the linearization of an analog value This allows for example the signal supplied by a thermocouple to be linearized and converted to 0 V to 10 V Controller Output of the Pulse Controller external manipu lated variable ps X effective Switch manipu external i lated manipu Manipula
273. trollers PV FAC1 P r en ee QLMNUP Process 1 ee Process 2 LZ ooo QLMNUP Controller 3 QLMNDN Process 3 Figure 3 9 Mixed controllers for three components The following figure shows a ratio control with two control loops Controller 1 is configured as a fixed setpoint or cascade controller Controller 2 is configured as a ratio blending controller The actual value of Controller 1 is selected as the Actual value D of Controller 2 The ratio factor FAC is specified via the setpoint value input of Controller 2 If a controller output is called as ratio factor FAC then the setpoint will be converted standardized with the help of an upper and lower barrier from 0 100 to the value range bottom barrier top barrier standardized If the manipulated variable of a secondary controller enters the limiting function or if the setpoint value increase of a secondary controller is limited by the ramp function in the setpoint value branch the l action component of the master controller is blocked direction specifically until the cause for the limitation has been eliminated in the secondary controller Controller 1 MNI Process 1 LMN 2 Controller 2 m o Process 2 rT Figure 3 10 Ratio control with two control loops FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E000593
274. ts of th FM 395 sasos ara dais e a a aeia rai a 3 28 3 6 Functional mechanisms and data storage in the FM 355 sssssesssesrsseerrsserrssrirrssrernssrennsens 3 30 3 7 Characteristics of th FM 355 icc sietvakecetecdenesdeceeeteheccees ie leeey ie ETA EAT 3 35 3 8 Parameter optimization with temperature Controllers 2 ccccceceeeeeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeteees 3 41 4 Installing and Removing the FM 355 0000 eee eccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeecaaaeeeeeeeeesecgaaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaades 4 1 4 1 Preparing for Installation sists scetens tedeas pieteta ves ita ecdea ds ecdgpla aa aaaeecceedes 4 1 4 2 Installing and Removing the FM 355 eeecececeseeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeesaeeeesieeeeesaeeeeenaeded 4 3 FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 vii Table of contents 10 11 viii Wing he FM 38E lomain aniraa a aa 5 1 5 1 Terminal assignment of the front connectorS sssssseeesrreseerresernesrrnneetrnnarennasrnnnaarennanennanes 5 1 5 2 Wiring front CONNMECHOMS 00 00 cececeeeeeeeeeeeeee ee eee ee ates ee innean EEN RENEA 5 8 5 3 Module Status After First Being Switched ON eeececeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeeaaeeeeeaeeeseenaeeeeeeaes 5 10 Parameter Configuration of the FM 355 ccccececsceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeeeaaeeeeaaaeeeeeeaaeeeseeaaeeeeeeenea 6 1 Installing the Parameterization Interface
275. ture P Setting GAIN Vmax X Tu C PI GAIN 1 2 X Vmax x Tu C PD GAIN 0 83 x Vmax x Tu C TD 0 25 X Vmax X Tu min TM_LAG 0 5 x TD min PID GAIN 0 83 X Vmax x Tu C Tl 2x Tu min TD 0 4 x Tu min TM_LAG 0 5 x TD min PD PID GAIN 0 4 X Vmax X Tu C Tl 2x Tu min TD 0 4 x Tu min TM_LAG 0 5 x TD min Instead of Vmax Ax At you Can use Xmax Tg In the case of controllers with PID structure the setting of the reset time and differential action time is usually coupled with each other The ratio TI TD lies between 4 and 5 and is optimal for most control systems Non observance of the differential action time TD is uncritical at PD controllers In the case of PI and PID controllers control oscillations occur if the reset time TI has been select by more than half too small A reset time that is too large slows down the settling times of disturbances One cannot expect that the control loops operate optimally after the first parameter settings Experience shows that adjusting is always necessary when a system exists that is difficult to control 2 16 FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Information for the controller adjustment 2 5 Setting the Controller Characteristic Values Optimization Feedbacks and Controlled Systems
276. uctions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 7 5 Implementing the FM 355 in the User Program 7 2 The function block PID_FM 7 2 4 Changing controller parameters via the OP Procedure If you want to change controller parameters of the PID_FM FB at the OP proceed as follows 1 Write the parameters that are to be changed from the OP into an auxiliary DB see 2 Do not transfer these parameters that are to be changed from the auxiliary DB into the instance DB of the PID_FM FB until after the initialization of the PID_FM FB triggered by COM_RST TRUE see has been carried out see 3 Transfer the parameters to the controller module by setting LOAD_PAR see Storage of the parameters in an auxiliary DB is necessary because after the start up of the CPU with COM_RST TRUE the PID_FM FB reads those parameters from the module that the CPU had transferred beforehand from the system data to the FM Auxiliary DB after initialization with COM_RST TRUE FM 455 LOAD_PAR TRUE COM_RST TRUE Downloading the system data start up STOP gt RUN Ofthe CP Figure 7 1 07_01_Changing controller parameters via OP If COM_RST TRUE is set the CHANNEL parameter is also checked If an invalid channel number was configured at the CHANNEL parameter the outputs QMOD_F and QCH_F are set COM_RST remains set and no further action of the FB is carried out FM 355 closed loop control module
277. ucture You can set different controller types for each controller channel of a C or S controller module e Fixed setpoint or cascade controller e Three component controllers e Ratio blending controllers The following operating modes can furthermore be selected at the step S controller e Pulse controller e Step controller with position feedback e Step controller without position feedback FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 How Does the FM 355 Control 3 4 Controller Negative deviation generation gt gt Process value A In the case of all controller types realized in the FM 355 C and FM 355 S the negative deviation generation is based on the same basic structure An effective setpoint value and an effective actual value is formed from the setpoint value and actual value by corresponding conditioning The negative deviation that is fed to the controller is formed by subtracting the effective setpoint value and effective actual value A signal selection can be carried out for the setpoint and actual values This results in universal application possibilities for the controller module The structures of negative deviation generation differ depending on the selected controller type The differences are shown in the following figures Preparing the set point VA Aa e Switching Ramp Limiting poi
278. ue manipulated value input controller variable FM 355 closed loop control module 11 18 Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Assignment of the Instance DBs 11 1 Instance DB of the PID_FM FB Addr Parameter Data Comment Permitted range of Default Explanation In para type English values setting meter configu ration mask 128 0 LMN_HLM REAL Manipulated LMN_LLM 100 0 100 0 The manipulated variable Limits of value high limit 2 is always limited to an manipula Upper limit of high and a low limit The ted value manipulated Upper limit of controller value manipulated value input specifies the upper limit this does not apply to step action controllers without analog position feedback 132 0 LMN_LLM REAL Manipulated 100 0 LMN_HLM 0 0 The manipulated variable Limits of value low limit 2 is always limited to an manipula Lower limit of high and a low limit The ted value manipulated Lower limit of controller value manipulated value input specifies the lower limit this does not apply to step action controllers without analog position feedback 136 0 MTR_TM REAL Motor MTR_TM gt 0 001 60 0 The actuating time from Pulse manipulated 2 end stop to end stop of shaper value s the control valve is controller Motor actuating entered in the Motor time s actuating time parameter Applies only to step controllers 140 0
279. ulated value 124 1 QLMNTRK BOOL Follow up operation FALSE The output Follow up mode indicates whether the manipulated value is tracked via an analog input FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 11 47 Assignment of the Instance DBs 11 8 Assignment of the DBs for Operator Control and Monitoring via OP 124 2 Addr Parameter QLMN_RE Data type BOOL Comment English Manual 1 Automatic 0 Permitted range of values Default setting FALSE Explanation The output Manual 1 Automatic 0 indicates whether the manipulated value is set to the external manipulated value LMN_RE Manual 0 or not In the para meter assign ment screen form 124 3 QLMNR_HS BOOL High limit signal of repeated manipulated value FALSE The output Upper end stop signal of position feedback indicates whether the control valve is at its upper limit QLMNR_HS TRUE means The control valve is at its upper limit For step controllers only 124 4 QLMNR_LS BOOL Low limit signal of repeated manipulated value FALSE The output Lower end stop signal of position feedback indicates whether the control valve is at its lower limit QLMNR_LS TRUE means The control valve is at its lower limit For step controllers only 124 5 QLMNR_ON BOOL
280. ule Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 FB 29 and FB 30 A 2 Instance DB of the FB 29 Introduction A 2 Instance DB of the FB 29 The parameters of the instance DB are listed in the following tables e Input parameters e Output parameters e Through parameters Input parameters Table A 2 Input parameters of the instance DB for the FB 29 PID_PAR Address Parameter Data type Comment Permitted Default Explanation In the English range of setting parameter values assignment screen form 0 0 MOD_ADDR INT FM 355 256 The module address module that resulted from the address configuration with FM 355 STEP 7 is given at this module input address 2 0 CHANNEL INT Channel 1to4 1 The number of the number 1 to 4 controller channel to Channel which the instance DB number 1 4 is referenced is configured at input Channel number 4 0 INDEX_R INT Index for 0 to 48 0 0 Refer to the section REAL The PID_PAR parameter Function Block Index for REAL parameter 6 0 VALUE_R REAL value for depending 0 0 Refer to the section REAL on The PID_PAR parameter respective Function Block value for parameter REAL parameter 10 0 INDEXI INT Index for INT 0 49to61 0 0 Refer to the section parameter The PID_PAR Index for INT Function Block parameter 12 0 VALUE _ INT Value for INT depending 0 0 Refer to the section parameter on The PID_PAR Value for INT respective Function Block p
281. ule has not been configured or is incorrectly configured e Module defective e Wire break with analog inputs only 4 to 20 mA e Overflow and underflow with analog inputs e Load break and short circuit with analog outputs Default setting The diagnostic interrupt is blocked by default Enabling the diagnostic interrupt In the Basic parameters screen you can block or enable the diagnostic interrupt for the module Responses to an interrupt triggering event The following happens when an event occurs that could trigger a diagnostic interrupt e The diagnostic information is stored in the diagnostic records DSO and DS1 on the module e The group error LED lights up e The diagnostic interrupt OB OB 82 is called e The diagnostic record DSO is entered in the start information of the diagnostic interrupt OB e lf there is no hardware fault the module continues to control If no OB 82 is programmed the CPU goes to STOP Diagnostic data record DSO and DS1 The information as to which event has triggered a diagnostic interrupt is stored in the diagnostic data records DSO and DS1 The diagnostic data record DSO contains four bytes the DS1 16 bytes whereby the first four bytes are identical to those of the DSO FM 355 closed loop control module 12 2 Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Faults and Diagnostics 12 2 Triggering diagnostic interrupts Reading the Record from the Module Diagnostic data reco
282. ule with the user program you have to create an instance DB and supply it with important data for each controller channel that you want to use 1 Use STEP 7 to create the instance DBs for the controller channels as data blocks with an assigned CH_DIAG function block 2 Enter the module address in the MOD_ADDR parameter at every instance DB The module address of the FM 355 is specified during the configuration of your hardware Take over the start address from HW Config 3 Enter the channel number of the corresponding controller channel 1 2 3 or 4 in the CHANNEL parameter at every instance DB 4 Save the instance DBs Call The CH_DIAG FB has to be called in the same OB as all the other FBs that access the same FM 355 Displayed values The following values are displayed e The parameter SP_R is only relevant at ratio or blending controllers It shows the ratio factor specified via the setpoint value input refer to the following figure e The parameter PV_R is only relevant at a blending controller It displays the effective actual value process value and is calculated as follows PV_R PV Offset PV_D refer to the following figure Offset is the parameter that can be configured via the Multiply command button e DIF_I is the input value of the D action components of the PID action controller not only at ratio or blending controllers refer to the following figure FM 355 closed loop control module 7 20 Op
283. under FM 355 PROFINET Their functionalities correspond to the blocks under FM 355 455 PID Control and are described in the same way in chapter 7 and 11 The blocks for PROFINET operation use the SFBs 52 53 81 for data transfer on the FM 355 SFCs for data transfer without PROFINET operation SFBs for data transfer with PROFINET operation SFC 58 WR_REC SFB 53 WRREC SFC 59 RD_REC SFB 52 RDREC SFC 54 RD_DPARM SFC 102 RD_DPARA SFB 81 RD_DPAR SFB 81 RD_DPAR In the blocks from FM 355 PROFINET the output parameter RET_VALU is formed from the 2nd and 3rd byte of the STATUS parameter of the SFBs FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 7 31 Implementing the FM 355 in the User Program PROFINET Operation Switching to PROFINET operation The blocks are not interface compatible When replacing proceed as follows Tool Function Comment LAD STL FDB File gt Source generation To not lose the parameter assignment again generate the STL sources of the instance DBs SIMATIC Manager Copying Copy the required blocks from the FM_PID gt FM355 PROFINET library into the user program The existing blocks can be overwritten LAD STL FDB File gt Compile Compile STL sources created above The following table shows the blocks with their SFCs SFBs for the data transfe
284. usts the SP2 in such a way that this objective is achieved as quickly as possible and without overshooting Tool software for creating and configuring a control as well as for optimizing the controller with the aid of the data gained from a section identification Totality of the controller control device and detector measuring device for the control variable A control device is the part of the control circuit that serves to influence the control variable on the process input Usually consists of the association of the control drive and actuator Totality of the controller control device and detector measuring device for the control variable A control device is the part of the control circuit that serves to influence the control variable on the process input Usually consists of the association of the control drive and actuator With the control loop you describe a connection of the section output control variable with the controller input and the controller output manipulated variable with the process input so that the controller and process form a closed loop Process variable output variable of the control section that is to be compared to the current value of the reference variable Your current value is called the process value FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Glossary 1 Glossary Controlled system With a controlled system we describe the part of
285. ut value 1 to 4 INT Selection of the auxiliary controlled variable actual value C for the controller 52 0 Actual value C 0 0 1 to 4 Analog input value 1 to 4 INT Selection of the auxiliary controlled variable actual value D for the controller 53 0 Actual value D 0 0 1 to 4 Analog input value 1 to 4 17 to 20 Manipulated variable LMN of Controller 1 to 4 INT Selection of the disturbance variable DISV for the controller 54 0 Disturbance variable 0 0 1 to 4 Analog input value 1 to 4 INT Selection of the position tracking TRACK_PER for the controller 55 0 Position adjustment 0 0 1 to 4 Analog input value 1 to 4 FM 355 closed loop control module 7 26 Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Implementing the FM 355 in the User Program 7 7 The PID_PAR function block Data type Description Index number INT Selection of the position tracking LMNR_PER for the controller 56 0 Position adjustment 0 0 1 to 4 Analog input value 1 to 4 INT Selection of the signal for changeover to safety value for the manipulated value of the 57 controller 0 Only specification via SAFE_ON parameter of the PID_FM FB 1 to 8 Specification via SAFE_ON parameter of the PID_FM FB ORed with digital input 1 to 8 INT Selection of the signal for changeover to tracking function of the manipulated value of 58 the controller 0 Only specification via LMNTRKON parameter of the PID_FM FB 1 to 8 Specification via LMNTRKON parameter of
286. ut variable via the l action component until the Negative deviation ER 0 However this only applies if the output variable does not exceed the limits of the operating range If the manipulated variable limits are exceeded the l action component retains the value reached at the limit anti reset wind up ER Manipulated Manipulated variable y variable GAIN ER GAIN ER t GAIN ER 9 ER t gt t TI Figure 3 17 Step response of the Pl action controller Smooth Changeover between Manual and Automatic Mode Control PD Control 3 18 In order to change over smoothly from manual mode to automatic mode of the PI PID action controller the integrator is corrected in manual mode so that the manipulated variable does not carry out step changes through the P and D action components during a changeover from manual to automatic mode An existing negative deviation is only corrected slowly via the l action component If no smooth changeover from manual to automatic mode is selected the manipulated variable makes a step change that corresponds to the current negative deviation starting from the current manual value during a changeover from manual to automatic mode An existing negative deviation is thus corrected rapidly You can deactivate the P action component in order to implement a pure control This is also possible by using the P_SEL parameter of the PID_FM function block The l action component is deactivate
287. utput 98 0 PV REAL Process variable Technical range of 0 0 The effective process values variable is output at the physical variable process variable output 102 0 ER REAL Error signal Technical range of 0 0 The effective negative values deviation is output at physical variable the Negative deviation output 106 0 DISV REAL Disturbance variable 100 0 100 0 0 0 The effective disturbance variable is output at the Disturbance variable output 110 0 LMN REAL Manipulated value 100 0 100 0 0 0 The effective manipulated value is output at the Manipulated value output At a step controller without analog position feedback the unlimited P D action component is output at the LMN parameter FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 11 43 Assignment of the Instance DBs 11 8 Assignment of the DBs for Operator Control and Monitoring via OP Addr Parameter Data Comment Permitted range of Default Explanation In the type English values setting para meter assign ment screen form 114 0 LMN_A REAL Manipulated value A 100 0 100 0 0 0 On the output of split range Manipulated value A of function repeated the split range function manipulated value position feedback in the case of continuous controllers the manipulated value A of the split range function and with step controllers with ana
288. uts Output current 0 1 A Rated load voltage 24 V DC Suitable for switches 2 3 4 wire proximity switches BEROs solenoid valves DC contactors and indicator lights When you supply the 24 V DC supply voltage by means of a mechanical contact the FM outputs carry the 1 signal for approximately 50 us depending on the circuit You need to take this into account if you connect the FM to fast counters FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 9 9 1 Properties of Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs 9 1 Properties of the Digital Inputs and Outputs Step Controllers Wiring and Block Diagrams The following figure shows the wiring diagram and the block diagram of the digital inputs and outputs of the FM 355 S a Backup ER Inputs L i 25 l N O O A O N CD SY o Backplane 2 4 bus I M Internal 4 o o o o o o o o o o Outputs L Backplane bus vec gt k iE Wa MiInternal N f o fo Jol Jo fo Jo Jo Jo ol jo n M M Terminal diagram Block diagram C
289. value Permitted range of values 0 0 to 20 0 mA or 1500 to 10000 mV or technical range of values Default setting 0 0 Explanation For example input PV_SIM 1 specifies the simulation value for the analog input 1 If S_PVON TRUE then the preprocessed analog input value is specified in this case If S_PVON FALSE and S_AION TRUE then the analog input value which is transformed into a preprocessed value by means of the preprocessing functions is specified in mA or mV In the parameter assign ment screen form 20 0 S_DION ARRAY 1 8 of BOOL Switch simulation of digital input by DI_SIM FALSE If for example S_DION 1 is set to TRUE the value DI_SIM 1 is used as the digital value instead of the digital input value 1 of the module 22 0 DI_SIM ARRAY 1 8 of BOOL Simulated digital input value FALSE 24 0 MOD_ADDR INT FM 355 455 module address 256 The module address that resulted from the configuration with STEP 7 is given at this input 11 24 FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Assignment of the Instance DBs 11 3 Instance DB of the FB FORCE355 Output Parameters Table 11 7 Output parameters of the instance DB to the FB FORCE355 Addr Parameter Data Comment Permitted range of Default Explanation In the type English values settin
290. vided into the units Negative deviation calculation Control algorithm and Controller output e Outputs of the FM 355 4 analog outputs only FM 355 C 8 digital outputs only FM 355 S FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 3 1 How Does the FM 355 Control 3 1 Basic Structure of the FM 355 Block Diagram of the FM 355 C The following figure shows the block diagram of the FM 355 C continuous action controller and the interconnection possibilities under the individual function blocks FM 355 C inputs Controller FM 355 C outputs Analog input Analog value 1 preparation i Analog output i i Controller 1 channels Analog input Analog value 4 preparation i i Reference i junction for analog i inputs 1to4 Analog output Controller 4 chapnels Digital input 1 S Digital input The inputs and outputs can be assigned freely to the controller channels Figure 3 1 Block diagram of the FM 355 C continuous action controller Interconnection Possibilities of the FM 355 C The function blocks of the FM 355 C do not have a fixed assignment to each other so that they can be interconnected by configuring parameters Each analog input has its own analog value conditioning filtering linearization scaling Up to 4 analog inputs and up to 3 digita
291. w Ti xt t Duration since the jump of the input variable FM 355 closed loop control module Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 2 11 Information for the controller adjustment 2 3 Control Response at Different Feedback Structures PID action Controller Step function on the controller input gt Input variable Step response of the continuous controller Output variable e gt Mn Step response of the pulse controller gt t A Output variable Figure 2 8 Jump response of a PID action controller FM 355 closed loop control module 2 12 Operating Instructions Edition 02 2006 A5E00059344 03 Information for the controller adjustment 2 3 Control Response at Different Feedback Structures Most of the controller systems occurring in process engineering can be controlled by means of a controller with Pl action response In case of slow controlled systems with a high delay time for example temperature control systems the control action results can be improved by a controller with PID action A x 100 Unit step response without controller w 0 Figure 2 9 Jump response at various control responses Controllers with PI and PID action have the advantage that the controlled variable does not have any deviation from the setpoint value after settling The controlled variable oscillates over the setpoint value during starting up Equation fo
292. w and overflow indication as for the indication range Exception Underflow indication at 4 to 20 mA 1 at lt 3 6 mA 0 at gt 3 8 mA In the case of a wire break the underflow display shows between 4 and 20 mA applies Or the lower or upper input value respectively of the polygon The lower value Further data for selecting a sensor analog inputs Permissible input voltage for voltage input destruction limit 30 V for a maximum of 2 inputs Permissible input current at current input destruction 40 mA limit Connection of signal sensors e For voltage measurement Possible e For current measurement as four wire measuring Possible transducers Characteristics linearization e For thermocouples e For thermoresistors Yes configurable Type B J K R S Pt 100 standard range Temperature compensation Yes configurable e Internal temperature compensation Possible e External temperature compensation with Pt 100 Possible Data for Selecting an Actuator Digital Outputs Output voltage e At signal 1 Min L 2 5 V Output current e Rated value at Signal 1 0 1A permissible range From 5 mA to 0 15 A e Leakage current at 0 signal Max 0 5 mA Load impedance range 240 Q to 4 KQ Output power e Lamp load Max 5 W Connection in parallel of two outputs e For logic operation Possible e For performance increase not possible Controlling of a digital input Possible

FM 355 closed-loop control module

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents